Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 358

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.

26
Issue: C 28.5.1999

MONOSPACE TM INSTALLATION

monosh1.wmf monosh2.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_01.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 2
Compiled by: FIS/ M. Peacock Date: 30.03.1998 Issue: C 28.5.1999
Changed by: FIS/ M. Peacock © KONE Corporation No of Pages: 306
Checked by: BU1/ H. Pettersson Product code: Language: en
Approved by: BU1/ R. Major Drawing no: SW: FM5.1 Win
Translated by:

PREFACE

FOR FIELD USE ONLY

The main differences between versions B and C are:


– The updated layout of the book and change of electronic format to suit FM 5.1 format.
– The improved consistency of the book.
– The chapter divisions have been changed.
– The daily intallation order guide is added.
– Copyright clause is added to every page.
– New plumbing chart
– Installation of the normal rear wall
– Additional car and landing door variations
– Appendix for KoneXion installation and SPI code settings is added.
– Appendix 1 and 2 are moved to the end of the book.
– The parameter settings and fault codes are as separate appendix in the end.

COPYRIGHT

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation.


All rights reserved under International Copyright Conventions. No part of the contents of this
manual may be copied, reproduced, or transmitted in any form or by any means or translated
into another language or format, in whole or in part, without the written consent of KONE Cor-
poration.

CONTACT INFO

E-line MonoSpace™ Installation Handbook


KONE Corporation
Technical Information Centre
P.O. Box 679
FIN 05801, Hyvinkää
Finland
Tel. + 358 20 475 2018
Fax. + 358 20 475 2292

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_01.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 3

Table of content
Chapter Heading Page
1 GENERAL 5
2 SAFETY 6
3 PREREQUISITES 6
The installation working order 23
4 COMMENCING 24
5 HOIST INSTALLATION 26
6 PREPARATIONS 34
7 LIFT WELL INSTALLATION 48
8 CAR INSTALLATION 64
9 GUIDE RAIL INSTALLATION 90
10 ATTACHING THE HOIST TO THE CAR 94
11 FINALISING UNDER THE CAR 98
12 INTERMEDIATE FLOORS 102
13 INSTALLATION IN TOP OF THE LIFT WELL 104
14 CAR SILL INSTALLATION 114
15 ADV LANDING DOOR INSTALLATION 116
INSTALLATION OF THE CONTROLLER CABINET AT THE TOP-
16 138
MOST LANDING DOOR
17 CAR FRONT 146
18 CAR DOOR INSTALLATION 150
19 ELECTRIFICATION 166
20 INSTALLATION OF THE CAR INTERIOR 196
21 CAR ELECTRIFICATION 216
22 LANDING DOOR FINALISING 224
23 ROPING 232
24 CAR FINALISING 258
25 FINALISING 262
26 COMMISSIONING OF THE CAR DOOR 282
27 SAFETY INSPECTION 286
28 FAULT FINDING 296
29 E-LINE MONOSPACE™ HANDOVER 300
APPENDIX 1. Sill and top bracket variations
APPENDIX 2. Minimum hole dimensions in masonry
APPENDIX 3. E-line KoneXion
APPENDIX 4. User Interface manual
APPENDIX 5. LCE Parameter list
APPENDIX 6. LCE fault codes
APPENDIX 7. SPI floor marking specification

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_01.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 4

Daily installation order guide for a standard MonoSpaceTM elevator


ELEVATOR PREREQUISITES to meet the schedule
Lift well 6 floors, 15 m travel, single side entrances Complete on time / error free delivery
Door AMDV2, non fire rated, installation with Installation site fulfilling the 5 Site Abso-
type expander bolts lutes
Car Fitters have installed 9 units prior
LF68, one handrail, one mirror, one COP
interior Respect working hours

This table is a day by day installation guide and explains how to split the working tasks.
Day Actions Task split
Arrival at site transport tools 1 2
Receive delivery 1
Install the hoist, set the plumbing jig and install the governor 2
1. Clean guide rails and mount fish plates 1
Hang and rope governor, place the plumbing jig and plumb the lift well 2
Transport guide brackets and prepare counterweight frame 1
Install and align first lengths of guides and brackets and buffers and counterweight frame 1 2
Install the car and pit ladder 1 2
Waste material handling 1
2.
Install the 3 ring of guide brackets and attach the hoist to car 1 2
Install and align next lengths of guides and brackets 1 2
Install the last lengths of guide rails and brackets 1 2
Install the car sill 1 2
3. Install the machinery and counterweight rope hitch 1 2
Install the landing door sills and top track brackets 1 2
Install the landing doors and signalization at 6th to 4th floors 1 2
Install the landing door and signalization at rest of the floors 1 2
Install the car front returns and door operator 1
Waste material handling 2
Install the last landing door 1 2
4. Install the control panel 1
Install the well top wiring, brake lever and shaft light 2
Install the trunking and shaft light, car wiring setting positioning system and ramps 1 2
Install the travelling cables and well wiring 1 2
Waste material handling 2
Install the pit wiring 1
Install the car roof electrification 2
Install the car interior 1 2
Roping and loading of counterweight 1 2
5.
Safety checks/ Commissioning removal of tools 1 2
Balancing and final steps 1 2
Clean down well and landings waste materials 1 2
Safety inspection

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_01.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 5

1 GENERAL

The installation method described in this instruction has been designed to ensure an efficient,
trouble-free installation, whilst maintaining safe working practices.
This is a general instruction which can be used for all MonoSpace elevators. Some of the com-
ponents may differ from those that are described in this instruction. In these cases refer to the
individual component AM -instructions. The main components which may vary are:
– Car installation
– Car sling installation
– Electrification
– Commissioning and balancing

To ensure trouble free and effective installation the following are mandatory
Requirement Note
The site must be 100% ready. (See Installation prerequisites on page 10.)
Transport routes on site defined and agreed as
close as possible to the lift well.
Lift well tolerances checked by the supervisor.
Delivery complete and on site.
Installation start date agreed with the customer.
A locking off system for main electric supply
e.g. fuse removal, locking and tagging system,
isolator, or other system, must be agreed with
etc..
main contractor before installation commences.
Installation tools available at site. Refer to the list of Tools on page 14
Refer to the list of Hand tools (recommended)
Recommended hand tools available.
on page 18
Refer to the list of Personal safety items on
Personal safety equipment delivered.
page 19

All installation tasks must be controlled and verified during installation by filling in the com-
pletion sheet which is used as a check list before:
– Commissioning
– Safety inspection
– Handover to maintenance
– Handover to customer

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_01.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 6

2 SAFETY

This is a new product with some new components and concepts which will not be familiar to
you. The recommended installation methods have been designed to ensure that the installation
process is safe. Do not take short cuts, there might be a potentially dangerous situation which
you have not considered.

General safety precautions


Safety precautions Note
The local safety codes and rules must be Refer to your local procedures for the type of
obeyed at all times! entrance protection required.
Follow the method described in this instruction. Warning signs highlight possible hazards.
There might be a potentially dangerous situa-
Do not take short cuts.
tion which you have not considered.

MAKE SURE THE POWER TO THE


MAIN SUPPLY CABLE CANNOT BE
TURNED ON!

A locking off system for main electric supply


isolator or other system must be agreed with e.g. fuse removal.
main contractor before installation commences.
Personal safety equipment is available and used Refer to the list of Personal safety items on
as required. page 19.
Caution - Safety harnesses with lanyards
When your safety harness is not secured to a
life line or other approved fixing point, ensure
the lanyard does not cause a catching or trip-
ping hazard.
Take care handling the waste in accordance
with the local regulations.

Do not connect or disconnect any connectors


when the power is on.

YOU MUST NEVER WORK BENEATH A


SUSPENDED LOAD NO MATTER HOW
SHORT THE TIME PERIOD!
Additional safeguards are used to ensure that
Always use the hoist in accordance with your
there is no unwanted movement of the car due
local regulations!
to hoist control or other failure.
The rust protection must be removed from the
rails. Otherwise, the safety gear will not operate
correctly.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_02.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 7

Danger signs Personal protection signs


Danger Sign Mandatory Sign

Electric shock Helmet and overall

Risk of falling Dust mask

Magnetic field Ear protection

Risk of fire Safety shoes

No entry Safety gloves

Entry prohibited Safety harness

General hazard
Safety goggles
warning

Suspended load

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_02.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 8

Special safety features in this installation method


Special feature Note
Do not drive on the car roof until the handrails
The car is used as the working platform.
are fitted.
The installation hoist is positioned on the car
roof and an additional securing rope is attached The installation hoist is used to move the car
to the overspeed governor hanging hook and during the initial stages of the installation.
the hoist pulley.
The installation hoist pulley and overspeed
governor are suspended from lifting hooks in
top of the lift well.
The elevator’s own overspeed governor and
safety gear are used during installation.
For driving downwards, press the safety pedal
The safety pedal keeps the safety gear engaged
down and drive slightly upwards before driving
whenever the car is stationary.
downwards to disengages the safety pedal.
A securing chain is used to secure the car to a
car guide rail bracket whenever the hoist hook
is disconnected from the car.
At certain times the hoist hook is removed from
When working from the car roof you must
the car whilst it is still used as a working plat-
always park the car using both the parking
form. During these operations the SAFETY
chain and the foot pedal before disconnecting
PEDAL MUST BE RELEASED and the
the hoist hook.
PARKING CHAIN MUST BE USED.
If there is a power failure on site, it is always
Emergency descent from the car roof. possible to move the car to a lower landing
level using the brake release lever.*
They are then fitted in the conventional way
Guide rails are hoisted using the lift car.
using the sliding clamp to lift each rail.

*Refer to Tirak Handbook, Emergency Descent section 4.4 page 11, Safety Advice section 6
page 13.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_02.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 9

a1126cr.wmf

ALWAYS KEEP THE


CHAIN AS TIGHT
AS POSSIBLE

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_02.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 10

3 PREREQUISITES

3.1 Installation prerequisites

The site inspection should take place at least one week before the installation is scheduled to
start.

The following things must be ready before starting the installation.


Requirement Note
Adequate lighting and 3 -phase power supply
Where required, the lift well lighting can be
for both the elevator and the installation hoist
lowered from the top floor and temporarily
temporary or permanent positioned according
secured to the plumbing jig supports.
to the layout drawing.
Lifting eyes positioned in the top of the lift well
according to the layout drawing and marked (See figure on right).
with the safe working loads.
Finished floor marks on each landing.
If applicable, setting out grid lines must be
marked on the lowest common floor area.
Lift well and pit cleaned and pit waterproofed. The lift well must be watertight.
C -inserts correctly positioned and cleaned. (If used).
Suitable material storage areas agreed with Manual transportation of material within 20
builder, adjacent to the lift well. metres/ close range from the lift well.
Suitable storage area for installation tools.
Clear, unobstructed access routes to at least one
entrance, at or next to the ground floor, for
long/ bulky items, (guide rails, car components,
doors etc.), defined and clear of obstructions.
Landings protected with coverings. According to the local safety codes/regulations.
Lift well dimensions and tolerances in accord-
ance with layout drawings.
Suitable provision for disposal of waste materi-
According to the local requirements.
als.
Appropriate fixing points for safety harness
According to the local requirements.
must be available.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_03.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 11

Dimension Distance
From the lift well front
A wall to the machinery lift-
ing hook centre.
From the lift well front
B wall to the overspeed gov-
ernor lifting hook.
C From the side wall to the
D A machinery and overspeed
C
governor lifting hook cen-
B tres.
From the machine lifting
hook centre to the hoist
D
pulley lifting hook centre
(in the centre of the DBG).

Loop capacity minimum 1500 kg.


a1126ic.wmf

a1126ao.wmf

Refer to your local regulations for type of entrance protection required.

a1126db.wmf
1126d f

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_03.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 12

List of abbreviations
SH Headroom height
PH Pit depth
WW Shaft width
WD Shaft depth
H Travel height
HF Floor to floor distance
Car
CH Clear car height
BB Clear car width
DD Clear car depth
NE Toe guard height

Frame doors Front doors

a1126gm.wmf a1126gn.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_03.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 13

Landing /frame door version


Slam post side
HH Clear opening height a1125jg.wmf
Lintel (side opening)
HF Floor to floor height
LL Clear opening width Non-slam post
side (side
FW Side wall width opening)
FW1 Side wall width
FW2 Side wall width

HR
HH
LR Raw opening width
HR Raw opening height

LL
LR
Landing /front door version
LW Side front width
LW1 Side front width
LW2 Side front width
FD Side wall depth
LR Raw opening width
HR Raw opening height
HA Front door lintel height
HB Front door extension height a1126go.wmf

Other
FFL Finished floor line Car walls / entrance marking
CL Central line C
DBG Distance between guides

A Marking of entrance e.g. A-door/side D B


B Marking of entrance e.g. B-door/side
C Marking of entrance e.g. C-door/side
D Marking of entrance e.g. D-door/side
A

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_03.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 14

3.2 Tools

Installation tools
Pieces Tool Figure
a1126fg.wmf

2 MonoSpace installation tool boxes.

Installation hoist, Tirak X series a1126fn.wmf


750 kg capacity + pulleys. See List
1
of the hoist equipment parts on
page 26.

Manual chain block capacity 500


kg. Height from hanging hook to
lifting hook max. 270 mm (when
1
the lifting hook is fully raised).
a1126eg.wmf
Lifting and manoeuvring chain
length 5,0 metres.
Content of MonoSpace tool boxes

Overspeed governor hanger posi-


1 a1126cq.wmf
tioning rod

Safety pedal for overspeed gover-


1
nor
a1126cp.wmf

1 Parking chain 2 m, 1500 kg a1126lf.wmf

158_3d.wmf

1 Plumbing tools

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_03.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 15

Pieces Tool Figure

2 Plumbing supports (pit)


177_3d.wmf

184_3d.wmf

1 Car guide alignment tool

1 Counterweight guide alignment tool


180_3d.wmf

Counterweight guide positioning


1
tool
175_3d.wmf

1 Unwinding device
a1126co.wmf

1 Work stool

a1126cm.wmf

1 Hoist test bracket

a1126fn.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_03.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 16

Pieces Tool Figure

1 Site trolley

a1126mt.wmf

1 Guide rail lifting clamp

165_3d.wmf

a1126bp4.wmf a1126ea.wmf

Guide rail lifting pockets and car


2 pairs
roof securing chains

4 Eyebolts for car 4 x M12 (male)


1 Eyeloop for car 1 x M10 (female) +
a1126kb.wmf
M10 Halfen bolt
Hoisting chains:
1 Extension chain 1,5 m 500 kg

1 Shortenable chain 2 x 1,5 m 500 kg

1 Car/door installation chain a1126ec.wmf


2 x 0,5 m 500 kg

2 Shackle 12 mm tap, 1500 kg


a1126fr.wmf

Car roof rope reeler securing


1
shackle, 8 mm, 350 kg
a1126fr.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_03.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 17

Pieces Tool Figure

Rope grip for rope reeler securing,


1
9 mm
a1126ft.wmf

Expanding fixing tool for car rear


1
wall a1126ka.wmf

Optional tools:
Pieces Tool Figure

a1126if.wmf
Group plumbing support for
duplex elevator with no separating
1
walls between lift wells (not
included in standard tool kit).

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_03.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 18

Hand tools (recommended)


Pieces Tool Note
Lockable tool box for the normal hand
tools
Tape measure, L 3,0 m
Carpenter’s ruler
Multimeter, protected against high voltage
Plastic tuning screw driver
Hammer drilling machine, with dust col-
lector
Cordless drilling machine; with adjustable
torque for ADV, Car & Controller installa-
tools.wmf
tion.
One extra accumulator (battery), bit cas-
sette including Phillips head and flat heads
in different sizes, drill bit cassette (sizes
1,5-10 mm).
Phillips head bit 150 - 200 mm.
Drill bits:
6 mm for fixing light fitting and pit stop
switches.
8 mm for trunking.
10 mm for pit ladder and travelling cable
wall fixing.
12 mm L (150) (Hilti for cutting through
reinforcing bars). a1126mc.wmf
Tool for concrete inserts
Draw wire, length 5-6 m For pulling the sliding clamp
Adjustable spanner, L 200-(250) mm
Spanners U end and ring end. Sizes 10, 11, NOTE: Minimum thickness for the
12, 13, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 mm 16 - 19 mm spanners is 5 mm
Ratchet 1/2" drive
Extension L 200 mm 1/2"
Sockets deep models 1/2", 13, 15, 16, 17,
18, 19 mm
Ratchet 1/4" drive small model
Extension 1/4", L 40 - 150 mm
Sockets 1/4" drive, 10, 11, 12, 13 mm
Screwdrivers:
Flat headed 5 mm L 200 mm.
Electrical model, isolated 2,5 - 3 mm head
L 150- 200 mm.
Phillips head: Standard size L 200 mm.
Carpenters hammer, 6 Oz. rubber handle “shock absorbent”
Sledge hammer, 1000 gram Hammer side flat and end drop forged.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_03.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 19

Hand tools (recommended)


Pieces Tool
Vice grip/ polie grip:
small model L 150 mm,
bigger model L 250 mm
G-clamp
Crow bar, L 500- 700 mm
2 Magnetic spirit levels, lengths 700 and 1500 mm
Engineers square, (300 x 150-200 mm)
Rivet pliers, replaceable head to cover the different rivet sizes
Side cutter, isolated handles (L 170 mm)
Long nose plier, medium model (L 170 mm)
File for guide rail joints, normal model
Rope cutting plier, 8 mm
Knife
Hacksaw, standard model
Bow saw, for cutting up wooden pieces to smaller waste
4 Plumbing weights, max. 10 kg/each (diameter max. 40 mm, length max. 300 mm)
Pulling rope to pull the installation hoist rope (plastic, 45 m, Ø6...8 mm)
Allen keys, set 3-12 mm
Pencil, carpenter
Disc cutter, disc > 125 mm
Sheet metal cutters, professional quality for 0,6...1,5 mm steel sheet
Engineers square, adjustable block width 30 mm for sill gap

Personal safety items


Gloves, safety shoes, helmets, goggles, dust masks, ear defenders and harnesses are provided
for your personal protection. YOU WILL USE THEM AS REQUIRED.

Pieces Tool Figure


Safety harnesses, rope length min.
2 a1126bs.wmf
3,0 m
Dust mask, suitable for working with
mineral wool insulation in landing
doors
First aid kit
Safety goggles
Safety gloves
Rubber gloves for cleaning rails
Ear protection
Hard hats
Work clothes / overalls
Safety shoes

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_03.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 20

Method tool boxes

toolbox1.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_03.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 21

toolbox2.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_03.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 22

For your notes:

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_04.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 23

The installation working order


COMMENCING on page 24 INSTALLATION OF THE CAR INTERIOR
↓ on page 196
HOIST INSTALLATION on page 26 ↓
↓ CAR ELECTRIFICATION on page 216
PREPARATIONS on page 34 ↓
↓ LANDING DOOR FINALISING on page
224
LIFT WELL INSTALLATION on page 48
↓ ↓
ROPING on page 232
CAR INSTALLATION on page 64
↓ ↓
CAR FINALISING on page 258
GUIDE RAIL INSTALLATION on page 90
↓ ↓
FINALISING on page 262
ATTACHING THE HOIST TO THE CAR
on page 94 ↓
↓ COMMISSIONING OF THE CAR DOOR
on page 282
FINALISING UNDER THE CAR on page
98 ↓
↓ SAFETY INSPECTION on page 286
INTERMEDIATE FLOORS on page 102 ↓
↓ FAULT FINDING on page 296
INSTALLATION IN TOP OF THE LIFT ↓
WELL on page 104: E-LINE MONOSPACE™ HANDOVER on
↓ page 300
CAR SILL INSTALLATION on page 114
↓ APPENDIX 1. Sill and top bracket varia-
tions
ADV LANDING DOOR INSTALLATION
APPENDIX 2. Minimum hole dimensions in
on page 116
masonry
↓ APPENDIX 3. E-line KoneXion
INSTALLATION OF THE CONTROLLER LEDs in the User Interface
CABINET AT THE TOPMOST LANDING APPENDIX 5. LCE Parameter list
DOOR on page 138 APPENDIX 6. LCE fault codes
↓ APPENDIX 7. SPI floor marking specifica-
tion
CAR FRONT on page 146

CAR DOOR INSTALLATION on page 150

ELECTRIFICATION on page 166

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_04.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 24

4 COMMENCING

Chapter Heading Page


4.1 Off-loading and distribution of materials 24
4.2 Transportation package groups 25

Introduce yourself to the site agent. Familiarise yourself with the site facilities, the local rules,
safety requirements and site management procedures.

NOTE: For personal safety and to prevent any damage to the components:
– Keep the working areas clear and unobstructed.
– Never go under any suspended load.
– Use correct manual lifting techniques.
– Wear gloves to protect your hands.
– Always wear a helmet.
– Wear safety harness and fix it to an approved fixing point while working in areas where
there is risk of falling.
– Wear goggles and dust masks as necessary.

4.1 Off-loading and distribution of materials

Positioning of material /tools

It is important that the tools and materials are positioned according to the installation sequences
to achieve and maintain a controlled installation environment throughout the installation.

Do not open the packages until you are ready to install the equipment.

1 Off-load the material to the destinated storage area in following order. See drawing below.
This ensures access to each component in the required installation order. Always try to
stand the machinery box (5) so that the side with the holes is downwards.
2 Check that the delivery is complete with the material documentation.

a1126mi.wmf

Transport route to lift well


(max. 20 meters)

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_04.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 25

A Topmost landing
– Long tool box
– Installation hoist top pulley
– Lift well lighting (if applicable) A
– Overspeed governor hanger
– Overspeed governor and rope
– Plumb support and template
– Hand tools
– Blocking plate
– Rope suspension counterweight side

B Entrance level /Storage area


– Installation hoist
– Parking chain
– Guide rail lifting clamp
– Car guide alignment tool
– Counterweight guide alignment tool
– Machinery
– Guide rails and brackets
– Counterweight and filler weights
– Car sling
– Ropes
– Car
– Controller B
– Car door and landing doors
– Lift well electrification a1126aq.wmf
– Ladder
– Smaller tool box
– Working stool

4.2 Transportation package groups

TRANSPORTATION PACKAGE
GROUP HEADER PACKAGE LABEL TEXT
PACKAGE GROUP LABEL
100 Installation requisites 110 Installation
requisites
200 Guide rails and shaft 210 Guide rails
beams 220 Guide rails fixings
230 Shaft beams
300 Doors 310 Doors
320 Car doors
330 Door operator
400 Machine room 410 Machinery
420 Ropes
430 Control panel
500 Shaft and machine room 510 Shaft equipment
520 Wiring
600 Car 610 Car
700 Car sling and frame 710 Car sling
720 Counterweight frame
730 Filler weights

The contents of each group is specified more precisely above.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_04.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 26

5 HOIST INSTALLATION

Wear a safety harness when working at unguarded landing entrances.

List of the hoist equipment parts


Pos. Item Greifzug’s component no.
1. Diverter pulley including the safety wire 33009
Depends on the required
2. Electric hoist
speed and options
3. Tension weight 57497
4. Manual rope reeler for max. 60 m rope 30158
5. Safety pin no. 2. 6 mm 12056
Electric supply extension cable for main power supply,
6. 16537
45 m, 5 x 1,5 mm2.
Depends on the required
7. Pendant controller
options
Depends on the required
8. Extension cable for the pendant control
speed and options
9. Car adapter for the hoist 53877
10. Car adapter for the hook 53887
11. Adapter axle 72415
12. Split pin 6,3 x 40 63496
13. Diverter pulley Ø160 mm 53997
14.1 Safety pin 5 x 32 mm for diverter pulley 63656
14.2 Safety pin no. 2. 6 mm 12056
15 Tension weight pulley Ø130 mm 20205

Travel /m Rope length /m


25 60
35 80
40 90

a1126gj.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_05.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 27

7.
1.

6. 8.
2.

5.

12.

4. 9.
11.
3. 10.

a1126em.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_05.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 28

Route the ropes and cables


Step Action Note
Lower the lifting rope and the power sup- Allow an extra 3 metres of power supply
1. ply cable from the top landing to the bot- cable at the bottom landing to reach the car
tom landing. roof later in the installation sequence.
2. Tie the lifting rope to the hoist rope.
Connect the power supply to the hoist and
Take care when unwinding the rope from
3. check the operation of the hoist safety
the rope reeler.
functions.
If the hoist motor does not run, reverse two
Drive out the hoist rope and pull it to the
4. phases in the plug by rotating the phase
top floor using the lifting rope.
changer in the plug housing.
Pull the hoist rope onto the top landing,
(allow 8 metres of slack to reach the lift
well roof and back after the top pulley is
5.
installed). Loop the hoisting rope through
the pulley and attach the safety rope to the
pulley hook.

Rope
entry Phase
changer

UP

tirak.wmf Rope exit


a1126by.wmf

m
+4
m
+4
harnes.pcx

a1126ba.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_05.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 29

+3 m

a1126ay.wmf a1126cc.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_05.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 30

Fix the ropes


Step Action Note
1. Attach the diverter securing rope to the governor hanger and fix using two cable ties.
2. Clip the securing rope hook over the overspeed governor suspension eye.
3. Slide the diverter pulley coach bolts into the slot in the lifting rod.
4. Lift the pulley up to the lift well roof and clip the hook over the hoist suspension eye.
5. Drive out the hoist rope and lower the hook to the pit
6. Clip the hoist hook over the suspension bar.
The hoist can now be used for material
transportation. Do NOT use the hoist for
Fit the lifting chain to the underside of the man riding until the hoist and hook are cor-
7.
hoist and drive the hoist into the lift well. rectly secured to the car structural ring,
(ChapterATTACHING THE HOIST TO
THE CAR on page 94).

1....2.

a1126v1.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_05.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 31

4.

3.

a1126bb.wmf
a1126bc.wmf

5....7.

a1126cl.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_05.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 32

Test the hoist equipment


If the lifting eyes in the well top have not been certified this test must be performed.
Step Action Note
Install the hoist test bracket in the lift well
1. wall on the guide rail side in the height of 1 M12 bolts /Halfen screws
- 1,4 metres from the pit floor.
Connect the car securing chain to the
2.
bracket.
3. Step out of the pit.
Drive the hoist slowly upwards until the Take up the tension smoothly. Any sudden
4.
hoist ropes are under tension. jerks may damage the equipment.
Motor power supply is automatically dis-
Run continuously until the load limit is
5. connected. Drive the hoist downwards to
reached.
reset.

NO PERSONNEL ARE ALLOWED IN THE LIFT WELL DURING THIS TEST

hazard.pcx el-risk!.pcx drop!.pcx

SAFETY CHECKS
ITEM REQUIREMENT RISK
Lifting equipment suspension Load marked, tested and in
Falling loads.
eyes. good condition.
Plugs and cables. In good condition. Electric shock.
Emergency stop button and Must prevent movement of Uncontrolled movement of
limit switches. hoist when contacts are open. hoist/car.
Must be inspected and in good
condition. When used must
Safety harnesses and ropes. Falling.
always be securely attached to
approved fixing points.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_05.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 33

1 - 1.4 m

a1126dh.wmf

Expander bolt M12


or Halfen fixing

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_05.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 34

6 PREPARATIONS

Chapter Heading Page


6.1 Overspeed governor /hanger 34
6.2 Plumbing jig assembly and hanging plumb lines 36
6.3 Plumbing and positioning 38
6.4 Plumbing groups of lifts 44

The main updated items of this chapter compared to issue B are:


– Correction of the plumbing chart
– Installation of the group lifts is clarified.

6.1 Overspeed governor /hanger

Hang the overspeed governor temporary


Step Action Note
Mark the final position of the overspeed
1. Measure it from the finished floor level.
governor base plate on the lift well wall.
Mark the installation time position of the This is shown on the layout drawing
2. overspeed governor (final position + 50 (MX05 = 1500 + 50 mm, MX06 = 1524 +
mm) on the wall. 50 mm, MX10 = 1521 + 50 mm).
3. Position the overspeed governor hanger rod in the suspension eye in the lift well top.
Bolt the overspeed governor and the spring The spring shackles are used as rope retain-
4.
shackles onto the bracket. ers.
5. Transfer the overspeed governor base plate mark from the wall to the hanger rod.
6. Slide the overspeed governor onto the rod.
7. Align the base plate to the wall mark and bolt it into position.
Rope the overspeed governor over the small groove and let the rope ends go down into
8.
the pit.
9. Loop the rope ends and secure them using a clip or cable tie.

1. 2...4.

Final position

a1126bf.wmf

a1126bg.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_06.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 35

6. 7. ... 8.

3.

a1126ak.wmf

7.

Mark

a1126al.wmf
a1126v2.wmf

a1126ck.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_06.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 36

6.2 Plumbing jig assembly and hanging plumb lines

NOTE:
1 The car guide plumb lines are always positioned to the front landing side of the car guide
rails.
2 Before assembling the jig refer to the layout drawing for the approximate corner plate posi-
tions.
Step Action Note
Install the plumbing supports at a height of
1. 1500 mm from the topmost landing floor Use min. 8 mm anchorage bolt.
level.
Fit the telescopic pipes.
Do not lean into the lift well or against the
2. Push the furthermost telescopic pipe into safety protection bars.
position using a piece of wood.
The pipe closest to the landing is placed in
3.
relation to the jig/landing door sill line.

1.
Frame door
1500

Front door

a1126ca.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_06.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 37

a1126na.wmf
2.

a1126au.wmf

3.

a1126mz.wmf

a1126av.wmf

a1126ed.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_06.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 38

6.3 Plumbing and positioning

Assemble the plumbing jig


Step Action Note
Fit the motor side angle support onto the Select the correct front aluminium profile
1.
plumbing support, (2.1). according to the DBG dimension.
Measure out and mark the DBG from the
Check that the extension of the aluminium
opposite end. Set the edge of the angle to
2. profile does not hit the lift well wall.
the mark and then square it using the sec-
Equalize if necessary.
ond angle support, (2.2). Tighten the bolts.
Fit the second angle support, check the
DBG and then fit the door line angle pro- Do not tighten this yet as it must be aligned
3.
file to the front of the plumbing support, to the car guide rail plumb line brackets.
(3).
Set the car guide rail plumb line brackets, Refer to the layout drawing.
measuring back from the door line angle Note: The car guide rail plumb lines are
4.
profile, (4.1, 4.2) by moving the profile offset 50 mm from the guide rail blade face
sideways. (4.3).
This should be 40+DBG+40 mm. (E.g. if
Check the dimension between the plumb
5. DBG is 1210 mm, this dimension should
line positions, (4.4).
be 1290 mm).
Refer to the layout drawing.
Adjust the lateral position of the door line Dimension X is the distance between the
6.
angle profile, (5). front face of the car guide rail and the edge
of the door clear opening LL.
Fit the fixing bolts for the jig into the pro-
7.
files, (detail YY).

Plumb line positions

40 + DGB + 40 mm

DBG
50

50

40 40
LL X 40mm

a1126gk.wmf Landing door sill line

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_06.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 39

a1126ar2.wmf

4.3

2.1

2.2

4.4 4.1

Detail YY:
5
4.2 a1126as.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_06.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 40

Set the plumbing jig in the lift well


Step Action Note
Adjust according to the top landing
8. Place the jig onto the supports.
entrance.
Use small weights when lowering the
wires. Always save the extra of plumb wire
Lower the plumbing wires for the car guide
9. for your next installation. This allows you
rails and the landing door to the pit.
to plumb down the lift well before the
delivery arrives on your next installation.
10. Tie the wires to the plumbing jig.
Adjust the plumbing jig position in accord-
11. ance with the layout drawing and re-tighten At top landing.
the clamps.
Lower the shaft lighting bundle. Tie it off This is done if there is no temporary lift
12.
temporarily onto the plumbing jig. well lighting.
Hang the plumbing weights to the lines in Any plumbing weight must not exceed 10
13. the pit and measure the lift well, if neces- kg/piece.
sary adjust the plumbing jig position.
Use a stick with minimum and maximum
Measure the lift well dimensions at each measurements for the car guide rail posi-
14.
landing. tions.
Fill in the plumbing table. Refer to How to For C and D dimensions use a carpenter´s
15.
fill the plumbing table on page 42. ruler.
Secure the plumbing wires to the stabiliz-
ing brackets in the pit and check the dis- Check the fixing height of the brackets in
16.
tances between the plumbing wires, (door the Drilling holes picture on page 51.
opening width LL and the DBG).

8.

a1126aw.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_06.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 41

9.

a1126ax.wmf

16.

40
B G+
+ D
40

LL

a1126dj.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_06.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 42

How to fill the plumbing table


The lift well dimensions must be controlled to ensure that the lift is installed in its opti-
1.
mum position.
Fill the tables according to the measurements. Refer to the layout drawing and fill the
2.
“Fix” row.
3. The recorded measurements must be kept with other lift documentation.

a1126mh.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_06.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 43

Elevator number: Measured by: Date:

SH

drop!.pcx
Well dimensions H
Pos. Measured
SH
H PH
PH
WW

WW
WD

Note: Do not forget the B side,


centre car and landing door offset. WD
a1126cz.wmf

L A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 B D C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6
FIX
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_06.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 44

6.4 Plumbing groups of lifts

Where two or more lifts are installed in adjacent lift wells it is essential that the lift fronts are
accurately aligned.
Step Action Note
Ensure that all the front plumb lines of the
1.
lifts are in line.
Construct a line at right angles to the lift
Work from a reliable reference point, (e.g.
2. well centre-lines as close as possible to the
the building grid lines).
front walls of the lift wells.
Measure out from each centre-line and
3. mark the door clear opening width of each
opening on the reference line.
If all the measurements are equal the plumb
Measure from each plumb line to the
4. lines are in line and aligned to the building
respective mark on the grid line.
grid.
If it is necessary to move the template in
Make your plumbing charts for each lift as
5. one lift well all the templates must be
before.
moved exactly the same amount.
For lift wells on opposite sides of a com-
mon lobby, check the plumb line alignment The centre-line must come in the middle of
6. of the adjacent lifts as before and then the plumb lines and measurements D must
measure across the lobby between the be equal.
plumb lines. (Distance D).

a1126eh.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_06.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 45

1.

pl18.wmf p l1 8

2.

reference line

pl1 9
pl19.wmf

pl20.wmf

3.
reference
line
clear opening pl2 0

4.

pl2 1

pl21.wmf

reference
line
6. D D
reference
line

= = p l2 2
pl22.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_06.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 46

Install the dividing beam

Step Action Note


It is important that the cars are on the same
Measure out and mark centre and height of
1. level in the well so that the work tasks can
the dividing beam.
be shared.
2. Install the wall base brackets.
Lift the beam on top of the wall base brack-
ets. Align the beam using the plumb wires
3.
and the car as reference. Check it with the
spirit level.
Install the guide brackets and align the
4.
guide rails.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_06.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 47

a1126mj.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_06.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 48

7 LIFT WELL INSTALLATION

The main updated items of this chapter compared to issue B are:


– Tool for concrete inserts is added.
– Shimming of the buffers is added.
7.1 First floor and pit equipment

Prepare guide rails and pit /Fitter 1


Step Action Note
Check the guide rails are straight.
The rust protection must be removed from
1. Clean the guide rails.
the rails. Otherwise, the safety gear will not
operate correctly.
2. Install the fish plates to the male ends only. Refer to the picture below.
3. Do up the bolts hand tight.
For the rolled form guides fit the jointing Refer to layout drawing for guide rail
4.
pieces in the top of each guide. placement.
Clamp the alignment tool to a car guide
Refer to the layout drawing and instruc-
5. rail. Adjust the DBG and check that the
tions.
tool is parallel to the guide.
Check the height of the car buffer accord- If needed adjust the height. (It is preset at
6.
ing to the layout drawing. factory).
Set the triangulation tool to correct dis-
7. Refer to the layout drawing.
tance.
Fix the wall bracket for pit ladder to the lift
well wall. Tie the ladder to the wall with a
8. Refer to the layout drawing.
chain so that it can not be removed from
the pit.

Guide rail principle:


Topmost guide rails
L = 2,5 metre
Notice: One of the 2nd
2nd topmost guide topmost guide rails has
rails L depending a female joint in both
on the lift well height ends.

Intermediate guide
rails L = 5 metre
a1126hg.wmf

First guide rails


L = 5 metre

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_07.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 49

a1126am.wmf a1126ch.wmf
a1126bh.wmf
6.

2.
4.

a1126an.wmf
5.

DBG

a1126ei.wmf 7.

a1126kf5.wmf 8.
1600

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_07.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 50

First floor /Fitter 2


Mark out and drill the fixing points of the guide rail brackets
Step Action Note
Place the guide rail footing, tension weight and the first 2 rings of guide rail brackets on
1.
the pit floor.
Note the measurement from plumb wire to
Transfer the plumb wire position to the both side wall and front wall.
2.
wall using a square. This measurement is used later to position
the plumb wires.
Mark out the height of the plumbing support and guide rail brackets.
3. Transfer the marks along the wall using spirit level, including the mark for the rear coun-
terweight bracket.
Use the square mark and transfer it to the
4. Refer to the drilling table.
drilling positions.

5. Drill the holes for all brackets.

a1126md.wmf

Table of drilling dimensions Motor side Single rail side


Motor type Dim X Dim A Dim B Dim A Dim B
MX05 400 mm 270 mm 80,5 mm 270 mm 80,5 mm
MX06 565/515 mm 270/370 mm 80,5/130,5 mm 270 mm 80,5 mm
MX10 695 mm 270 mm 77 mm 270 mm 77 mm

Lift the first guide rails


Step Action Note
Tie the draw wire to the sliding clamp to help pulling it back down the guide rail when the
1.
hoist is lowered.
Prepare to lift the guides in to the pit using The T60 guides can be lifted by hand (15
2.
the sliding clamp, fish plates up. kg /guide).
If there is insufficient space in the pit to The rest of the guides can be positioned in
place all the guide rails at the side and rear the pit later when the car has been moved
3.
of the car, start with the first 2 runs of guide up the lift well. Refer to the layout draw-
rails only. ing.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_07.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 51

Drilling holes
370
270

1600mm
MX06 DIM A

X A

B
550mm

420 mm

a1126a.wmf

1. 2.

a1126cv.wmf

a1126ci.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_07.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 52

Install the first two rings of brackets


Step Action Note
Ensure that the combination side brackets
1. Fix all the wall base brackets.
are in level.

Position and fix all the brackets to their


positions.
2.
Centralise the brackets.
Leave bolts hand tight.

a1126md.wmf
Align the guide rail brackets by hand.
3. Use the correct markings for the guide rail type.
Tighten the brackets

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_07.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 53

Use correct mark for


guide type
a1126ab.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_07.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 54

Fix the first guide rails


Step Action Note
1. Lift the car guide rail.
Place car buffer on footstool and place the
2. Leave the guide rail clips loose.
guide rail clips for the buffer footing.
Fit car buffer to the guide rail and fix the
3.
tension weight.
Place the rail carefully alongside the
4.
plumb line fixing.
Relocate the plumb weights inside the
5.
buffer supports.
As the car will be assembled on the buffers.
Correct levelling of the buffers is essential.

Check that the buffers are level.


6. Use shims.
Loosen the buffer from the top.

bufshims.wmf

Position and fix the car guide rails to the


7.
brackets.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_07.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 55

3.

2.

a1126ac.wmf

1.
5.

Tension weight

a1126cf.wmf a1126fa.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_07.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 56

Align the first car guide rail


Step Action Note
1. Make sure that all the car guide rail clips are tightened.
Clamp the plumbing gauges onto the guide The rail is aligned when:
rails. – The plumb wire is touching the
Misalignment in back to front direction can pointer on the alignment tool.
2. be corrected by loosening the guide clip – The parallelity string line wire aligns
and moving the rail. with the holes in the alignment tool.
Parallelity and DBG direction can be – DBG is within the stated tolerance
adjusted at the guide rail brackets. +1 mm - 0 mm at the clip level.
If the magnets are dirty, clean them using a
3. Not with your finger
dry cloth.
4. Rope the tension weight. Temporarily fix the rope ends together.

4.

a1126ce.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_07.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 57

2.

mm
40
50m
m

a1126gl.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_07.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 58

Align the counterweight guides


Step Action Note
Lift 2 counterweight guide rails in to the
1.
lift well.
Fix and tighten the first counterweight Fix the fixing plates for counterweight
2.
guide rail to the combination bracket. screen under the same bolts.

Fix and tighten the counterweight buffer


3.
plate to the guide rail.

Place the rear counterweight guide rail in


4.
the buffer plate.

a1126ej.wmf

Clamp the alignment tool in the middle of


5.
the two brackets. a1126ag2.wmf

Align the brackets with the alignment tool


6.
and the diagonal positioning stick.

Hold one side of the diagonal positioning


Check the alignment with the diagonal stick against the rail and move the other
7.
position stick. end against the other rail up and down. The
other end should just touch the rail face.
Fix the rear counterweight guide rail to the Fix the fixing plates for counterweight
8.
counterweight guide bracket. screen under the same bolts.
Check DBG at bottom using alignment
9.
tool.
Tighten the rear counterweight guide rail
10.
fixing.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_07.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 59

8.

2.

8.

2.

a1126iu.wmf

7.

a1126ag1.wmf a1126ag4.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_07.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 60

Install the counterweight frame


Step Action
Install counterweight guide shoes on the combination bracket side. Loosen the front plate
1.
screw joints of the diverter pulley to easy the roping.
2. Fit hoist chain through pulley.
3. Lift counterweight between the counterweight guide rails into pit.
4. Manoeuvre in between guides and push shoes over rail.
5. Lower frame onto buffer.
6. Fit upper guide shoe.
7. Fit lower guide shoe.
8. Shim the guide shoes to achieve 1mm clearance on both sides.
9. Fix the oil lubricator brackets.

The skewed counterweight frame for the elevators with MX10 machinery

Combination guide
rail side

4.
a1126ah.wmf

2.
a1126ai.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_07.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 61

Counterweight for elevators with MX10

7.

a1126aj.wmf a1126nb.wmf

8.

fso11.wmf fsu11.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_07.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 62

Bracket combinations

Combination guide rail brackets


MX05 MX06

.4 40
0. . .3 70
34 0. .
20

MX10
9
.. .33
1 95

70
...3
2 05

Counterweight guide rail bracket

.3 69
9. .
10

a1126da.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_07.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 63

Single side car guide rail brackets

Adjustable from 50 to 80 mm Adjustable from 85 to 245 mm


and from 80 to 110 mm
to
up 5mm
24

0 mm
...8
50

to
up mm
5
16

m m
.110
..
80
to
up mm
5
12

mm
85

a1126fm.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_07.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 64

8 CAR INSTALLATION

Chapter Heading Page


8.1 Preparation 64
8.2 Platform 66
8.3 Rear wall 74
8.4 Structural ring 76
8.5 Car panel assembly 81

The main updated items of this chapter compared to issue B are:


– Additional information of the contents of the packages
– The installation of the normal rear wall

8.1 Preparation

Step Action Note


Move the plumb lines temporarily out of So they will not be damaged when the car
1.
the way. platform is lifted into the lift well.
The car components are packed in two
packages: one crate for the counterweight
and sling function parts and a box for the
car parts.
2. Open crate and the car part box.
a6611dc.wmf

Check the contents of the delivery against Do not unpack the components until they
3.
the packing list. are needed.
Close the packages and protect against
4.
water and dust.

Car wall layout


Step Action
In the car package on top of the car floor, is the individual order bound layout of the car
1.
package. Refer to this layout drawing when assembling the car walls.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_08.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 65

Contents of the cubic box Contents of the long crate


Platform Assembled counterweight frame and accessories
Wall panels Upper beam
Roof and ceiling panels Sliding shoes and brackets
Accessories Uprights
Fixing bolts and nuts Safety gear legs
Pit ladder Bottom pulley beam
Counterweight screen Fixing bolts and nuts
Overspeed governor
Door operator
Counterweight rope hitch
Car side rope hitch with load weighing device
Parking plate

MIRROR

HAND RAIL

COP

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_08.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 66

8.2 Platform

Unpack and transport car parts


Step Action Note
1. Lift the safety gear legs and pulley beam out of the crate.
2. Lift the pulley beam to the lift well pit using Tirak and cover it against water and dust.
Fix the overspeed governor rope to the If necessary, disconnect the anchorage
anchorage plate using at least 3 clips on plate from the synchronisation package.
3.
each side. Leave a 200 mm space between Check that the tension weight is about
the first and second clips. 50 mm above the normal position.
Loosely fix the motor side leg only using
the 2 screws. Check which is the motor
Fix the safety gear legs to the platform on
4. side in the layout drawings. Spanner size
top of the box.
15 mm. Synchronisation bar is always in
front side.
Bend the motor side safety gear leg to The safety gear roller must be tightened to
5.
make the transportation easier. prevent it moving during transportation.
Place pieces of timber to the site trolley to
6. Fix the lifting eyebolts to the platform. protect the safety gear arms of the plat-
form.
The motor side should be up and rear side
7. Lift the platform to the site trolley.
to the front.
Mark the position of the guide rails on the cardboard protection of the floor. This makes
8.
the positioning of the platform during lowering easier.
Transport the platform to the landing level Do not damage the floor finish or safety
9.
using the site trolley. gear mechanism.
10. Cover the package to keep the remaining parts clean.

3.
200

a6611eu.wmf
200

a1126hu.wmf

11 2 6 h f
Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_08.fm
Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 67

4.&5.&6.

M10 x 25
041.wmf

Motor side safety gear leg

M10 x 25

a1126hx.wmf

7. & 8. Motor side 9.

Rear side

Piece of timber

a6611ev.wmf a1126hta.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_08.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 68

Prepare platform for lifting


Step Action Note
Place the platform on the site trolley out-
side the lift well so that the synchronisation
bar is on the overspeed governor side and Refer to the layout drawing.
1.
the floor surface is facing the single car Tie the platform to the trolley.
guide rail when the platform is lifted to the
lift well.

2.

Check that the


roller is secured
at low position
Check that the safety gear rollers are
2.
secured at the lower position.

a6611ca.wmf
3. Leave the upper leg free to pivot loosely.
Attach the parking chain to the lifting
4.
shackle of the hoist.
Attach the shortenable chain between park-
Adjust both ends of the shortenable chain
5. ing chain and the upper eyebolts of the
to centre of gravity.
platform.
Secure the manual chain hoist to the end
6.
loop of the parking chain.
Fix the double 0,5 metre chain from the
7. manual chain hoist hook to the lower eye-
bolts of the platform.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_08.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 69

REAR SIDE

Synchronisation bar

a6611ib.wmf FRONT SIDE

4.
Parking
chain

5.
Shortenable
chain

a6611bn.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_08.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 70

Lift the platform to the lift well

NEVER GO UNDER ANY SUSPENDED LOAD

harnes.pcx
Step Action Note
If necessary, use a piece of timber to pre-
1. Lift the platform into the lift well. vent damage to the safety gear while mov-
ing and lowering the platform.
Lower the floor into the pit and adjust the
2. Take care not to damage the guide shoes.
chains.

Lower the car floor down so that the safety


gear legs are 30 mm away from the buffer.
3.
Use the line on the cardboard to locate the
floor assembly over the guide rail blades as
you lower the floor.

2.

a6611bm.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_08.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 71

1.

drop!.pcx

a6611cn.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_08.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 72

Fix the safety gear leg


Step Action Note
Fully open the machinery side safety gear Always make sure that the leg is tightened
1.
leg. against the platform before fixing the bolts.
Enter the pit and push back the pivoted safety gear leg.
2.
Install all bolts hand tight.
3. Ensure that the leg top is flush with the floor fixing plate.
Tighten the bolts starting on the bolts out side of the floor closest to the guide rail.
4.
Tighten the other bolts.
5. Lower the floor down on the buffers.

2xM10x25

a6611cr.wmf
a6611br.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_08.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 73

3.
4.

a6611bs.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_08.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 74

8.3 Rear wall

Lift the normal rear wall in position


Step Action Note
Lift the rear wall in position on the plat-
1.
form.
Leave the rear wall leaning against the lift
2.
well wall.

Lift the glass wall in position


Step Action Note
1. Put the piece of timber under the platform. Check that the back wall is centered.
Lift the window wall onto the platform
2. using Tirak hoist.
Fix the temporary supports to the eyeloops
3. on the platform sides.
4. Remove the extra hangers of the back wall.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_08.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 75

2.

1.

a1126hv.wmf

4.

3.

a1126hva.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_08.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 76

8.4 Structural ring

Place the upper beam


Step Action Note
The blocking device is positioned on the
Position the upper beam on the platform
1. combination guide rail side facing the car
between the guide rails.
front.
Install the sliding shoe brackets to the
2. Spanner 15 mm, M10 x 25 mm.
upper beam.
Check by looking at the holes on the top of
the bracket that the sliding shoes are:
(A) centralised in a front-to- back direc-
Align the sliding shoes to centralise the
3. tion. (B) centralised in the DBG direction.
beam between the rails. Tighten the bolts.
(C) in a 90 degree angle to the guide rails.
(D) The gap between the guide rail and the
sliding shoe must be 1 mm.
4. Attach the upper beam to the electric hoist.
Lift the upper beam above the height of the
5.
uprights using the electric hoist.

1. & 2.
M10x25

4. & 5.

a1126hr.wmf

a6611ff.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_08.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 77

3.

(A)

(B,C)

a1126hra.wmf

(B,C)

1 mm (D)
a1126hrb.wmf

a1126hrc.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_08.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 78

Place the uprights and bolt the structural ring


Step Action Note
1. Lift the uprights into position.
2. Fix the lower ends of the uprights. Spanner 19 mm, bolts 6 x M12 x 25.
Check that the uprights are equally posi-
3.
tioned from the car floor front.
Check that angles of the uprights are rec-
4. tangular to the floor. Tighten the bolts in Spanner 19 mm, bolts 6 x M12 x 25.
the lower end.
Lower the upper beam onto the top of the
5.
uprights.
Fix the upright to the upper beam with
6. Spanner 15 mm, bolts 12 x M10 x 30.
bolts and nuts on each side.

2.
1.

a6611dh.wmf

=
3.
=
a6611dg.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_08.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 79

5.

4.

a6611cp.wmf

a6611cq.wmf

6.

car105.wmf car110.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_08.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 80

Assemble the safety gear arms and synchronisation bar and fix the overspeed governor rope
Step Action Note
1. Fix the horizontal lever to the upright (A). Spanners 2 x 13 mm
2. Fix the vertical lever to the lower horizontal lever (B).
3. Fix the safety gear lever to the lower horizontal lever (C).
4. Fix the safety gear spring to the hole (D) in the horizontal lever.
5. Remove the cable ties from the safety gear rollers.
Check (by moving the roller lever arm) that the rollers lift simultaneously and engage the
6.
rails at the same time.
Check that the gap between the guide rail
Safety gears are factory pre-adjusted.
and the safety gear is 3 mm.
7. Adjust the safety gear position with an
Use the keeper plate of the single guide rail
allen key and a spanner if needed.
bracket as a gauge for the gap.
Fix the anchorage plate to the upper lever
Check the machinery type in the layout
8. (according to the machinery type, MX10 or
drawing.
MX05/06).
Always try to fit the safety pedal on the
Fix the safety pedal rope to the lever. Loop machinery side to avoid interference with
9.
the other end of the rope first. the car top cross connection box.
Refer to the layout on page 86.
Remove all the lifting eye loops from the If there is a glass back wall, leave the rear
10.
platform. side eye loops in position.

1, 2, 3, 4 A
5.

Remove the
cable tie

C
B D

a6611az.wmf

a6611az.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_08.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 81

3 mm
7. 8.

MX05/06
MX10

a1126hy.wmf

a6611gc.wmf
.
a6611ev.wmf

9.

a6611ed.wmf

10.

8.5 Car panel assembly


a6611ci.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_08.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 82

Place the wall modules


Step Action Note
Fit the lifting pockets for the guide rails
to the platform.
If the travel is 12,0 m or less, lifting
1. pockets are not used.
Refer to pictures below for lifting
pocket positions vs. motor type.
Pay attention to the wall element joints.
Place the rear wall into the back track of
2. the platform and lean it against the lift
a6611cw.wmf
well wall.
Fix the corners to the side wall panels Adjust the correct height before tightening the
3.
using the bolts and cage nuts. fixing bolts if needed. SS = flooring thickness.
Place the rear side wall panels behind
the uprights loosely in position. Make sure that the panels are in the bottom of
4.
Be careful not to damage the lower the slot.
ends of the panels.
Push the wall panels tight against the
uprights. Make sure there are no gaps between the
5.
Fix the wall panels to the uprights using upright and the wall panel surfaces.
pop rivets.
Pull the rear wall in position and fix it to the corners of the rear wall panels with M6 x 16
6.
bolts.
Check that there is no interface from the lift-
Place the front side wall panels in posi-
ing pockets to the wall panel joints.
7. tion against the uprights and fix using
pop-rivets like the rear ones.
Handle the panels carefully.

Guide rail lifting pocket positions according to the machinery type


MX06 and MX10 MX05

2 x RT60
1 x T82-T89 2 x T70
2 x RT60

In the smallest
cars 1 x T82-T89
Alternative position
for the lifting pockets

a6611in.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_08.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 83

FFL
3.
2. 4.

SS

SS+67 mm

a6611cj.wmf
SS+67 mm
Wall panel module 5. Upright
POP rivets
4.2 mm

a6611iv.wmf

6. Isolation strip
wallupri.wmf

a1126hz.wmf 7.

wallupr2.wmf a6611.fb.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_08.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 84

Place the roof panels and the rear wall


Step Action Note
If a trap door is included, the rear roof
Lift the rear and front roof panels onto the
1. panel group is replaced by a large single
side wall panel modules.
panel with an integrated trap door.
Use from 3 to 5 bolts for each panel
Bolt the edges of the inner panels to the top
2. depending on the panel size. Use M6 x 16
beam of the structural ring.
bolts, spanner 10 mm.
One bolt for each panel junction and one
additional bolt for each corner, where the
3. Fix the side walls to the roof. holes correspond. DO NOT FIX THE
BOLTS AT THE LOCATION OF THE
MIRROR.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_08.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 85

1.

3.

2.

a6611ck.wmf a6611aj.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_08.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 86

Finalise the car roof


Step Action Note
Tighten the upper expanding fixings of the
1.
corner fixings.
Cut and bend the kick plates in accordance Overlap the profiles at the corners.
with the car roof dimensions.
2.
Fix using self-drilling screws. This secures Do not fit the kick plates in the car electri-
the car roof to the wall modules. fication box and safety pedal area.
Assemble the balustrade at the landing, lift
to the car roof, align and fix it to the car Check the lengths of the bars on each side
3.
roof in accordance with the layout draw- before assembling.
ings below.

a6611ip.wmf TRC = travelling cable


MX05 CTCB = car top connection box

40 120
TRC
120

CTCB CTCB

TRC

MX06 / MX10

TRC

CTCB
CTCB

TRC

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_08.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 87

a6611ao.wmf a6611cg.wmf
1.

2.

3. a6611dn.wmf
a6611ey.wmf
4.

a6611dq.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_08.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 88

Install the safety pedal and guide rail securing chains


Step Action Note
Always try to fit the safety pedal on the
machinery side to avoid interference with
Install the safety pedal on the car roof and
the car top cros connection box.
1. connect the rope from the safety gear arm
Refer to the layout on page 86.
to the pedal.
In small car, use piece of timber in the edge
of the car roof to protect the rope.
Make sure the safety gear is disengaged
Press the pedal down and lock the safety
2. when the pedal is pressed down.
pedal rope in the rope grip.
DO NOT PULL THE ROPE.
Install the guide rail securing chains on top
3. of the car above the lifting pockets using
self-drilling screws.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_08.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 89

a1126bl.wmf

In the smallest cars

a1126bk.wmf

a6611ir.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_08.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 90

9 GUIDE RAIL INSTALLATION

The main updated items of this chapter compared to issue b are:


– Correction of some wording

9.1 Third ring of guide rail brackets

Continue the guide rail and bracket installation

How to share the work


Step Fitter 1 /combination bracket side Fitter 2 /single car guide rail side
Measure the height of the bracket from the
previous brackets fixing position. Fit the bracket to the guide.
1.
Refer to the layout drawing for the dis- Push the bracket back to the wall.
tance.
Measure the distance between the car guide
shoe and the bracket’s clip level on the
Fit the bracket to the guide.
2. combination side.
Push the bracket back to the wall.
Adjust the bracket on the opposite side
accordingly.
Measure 50 mm from guide rail to the Measure 50 mm from guide rail to the
3. plumb wire. Centre the wall base with plumb wire. Centre the wall base with
bracket. bracket.
Drill hole to the wall trough the horizon- Drill hole to the wall trough the horizon-
4. tally slotted hole and fix the bracket to the tally slotted hole and fix the bracket to the
wall. wall.
Drill an other hole, level and fix the Drill an other hole, level and fix the
5.
bracket. bracket.
Bolt the counterweight guide rail to the
6.
bracket.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_09.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 91

a1126eo1.wmf
1. 2. 3.

4.
5.

a1126eo4.wmf
6.

Fitter 1

a1126eo5.wmf
1. 2. 3.

4.
5.

Fitter 2

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_09.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 92

How to share the work


Step Fitter 1 /combination bracket side Fitter 2 /single car guide rail side
Align the brackets and check the DBG.
7.
Check that all bolts are tightened.
Bolt the rear counterweight bracket to the
8. Prepare next ring of brackets
rail and push back to the wall.
Level the single counterweight bracket
9. height from the combination bracket using
the alignment tool.
Align the guide rail using diagonal position
10.
stick. Finally tighten.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_09.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 93

7. 8.

a1126eo3.wmf

9. & 10.

a1126eo2.wmf

Both fitters Fitter 2

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_09.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 94

10 ATTACHING THE HOIST TO THE CAR

Attach the hoist to the car


Step Action Note
Lower the installation hoist to the car roof Install the axle so that the securing ring is
1. and bolt it to the structural ring, always on same side of the structural ring as the
on the opposite side to the machinery. car cross connection box.
Take the hoist hook from the hoist and
The installation hoist can only be used for
attach it using the adapter piece of the
2. man riding when it is attached to the car
hoist anchorage kit to the structural ring
as shown.
opposite to the hoist.
If your installation includes a car with a sling, install the hoist anchorage kit into the holes
in the top beam.
Fixing for slings CF 06 to CF 10
max. 30° max. 30°
3.

Locate the power supply connector, so


Route the trailing flex for the power supply
4. that it can be easily disconnected in case
carefully.
of hoist failure.
5. Place the rope reeler on the car roof and clamp the rope to the handrail.
This should be positioned just below car
Install the tension weight provided for the roof level, when the car is on the buffers.
hoist rope.
6.
For the narrow lift wells use optional tension When travelling, pay attention to the ten-
sion weight rope. If it is twisted, unturn
weight.
the twist by turning the rope reeler.

Cross connection box

a1126bn.wmf a1126bma.wmf

Fixing on the opposite to the machinery Machinery side fixing

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_10.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 95

If the hoist is in 2:1 mode the maximum load for man riding is
1500 kg and the hoist must be fixed to the car structure using two
separate anchorage points as shown below.

a1126ht.wmf

a1126bm.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_10.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 96

Test the safety gear


Step Action Note
1. Press the safety pedal down.
2. Drive the car upwards.
3. Drive the car downwards.
Release the pedal.
4.
The car should come to a complete stop!
Drive the car upwards and then back below
5. the safety gear engagement marks on the
guide rails.
They should be at the same height, and of
6. Check the marks.
even depth.
If the marks are not equal repeat the proce-
7.
dure.
If the marks still do not align the safety Refer to the safety gear adjustment proce-
8.
gear must be adjusted. dure on page 80.
Check that the tension weight rope does not
9.
get twisted or tangled.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_10.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 97

1.

2.

a1126cg1.wmf

3.

a1126cg2.wmf

4.

a1126bj.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_10.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 98

11 FINALISING UNDER THE CAR

The main updated items of this chapter compared to issue B are:


– This chapter is separated from chapter 10 in the previous version.
– Fixing of the alarm button is added.

DO NOT GO UNDER THE CAR UNTIL THE SAFETY GEAR IS CORRECTLY ENGAGED
AND THE CAR IS SECURED TO THE HOIST OR THE PARKING CHAIN.

Finalise the bottom of the car


Step Action Note
Raise the car so that you can go under-
1.
neath.
Drive the car down and engage the safety
2.
gear switch.
Clearance from lift well wall to the hanger
500 mm.
Fit the travelling cable hanger under the car
3. Measure the distance from the car guide to
platform according to the layout drawing.
hanger, to find the correct location for the
top wall fixing.
Fix the alarm button to the travelling cable
4.
hanger.
Check the guide shoe tolerance (max. play
5.
2 mm total).
Adjust the safety gear bracket position. The safety gear must be fully engaged
6.
Tighten the fixing screw. before the adjustment.
Control that clearance between the safety
7. The safety gear must be fully released.
gear switch and the plate is 3 mm.
Route the cables of the safety gear switch
8.
and the alarm button to the car roof.

Note: The car must not be left on the buffers for long periods. This is to prevent perma-
nent deformation of the buffer material.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_11.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 99

3. Travelling cable hanger position


a6611ih.wmf

a6611bp.wmf

500 mm

Alarm button location


a6611hk.wmf
6.

a1126mw.wmf

7.

3 mm
a6611hka.wmf

a6611ag.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_11.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 100

Secure the low end of the wall panels


Step Action Note

a6611fh.wmf

Fix the wall panels with self-drilling


1.
screws from underneath the platform.

2. Fix the lower corner screws and tighten the expander bolts for the lower corner fixings.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_11.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 101

2.
a6611di.wmf

a6611ao.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_11.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 102

12 INTERMEDIATE FLOORS

The main updated items of this chapter compared to issue B are:


– This chapter is separated from the chapter 10 in the previous version.

Lift and joint the guide rails


Install the guide rails, floor by floor until you have reached the top of the lift well.
Step Action Note
If the car is not on the buffers, it must be
Drive the car to the pit.
1. secured on the safety gear and the parking
Keep the chain tightened.
chain whenever the hoist hook is removed.

Lift the guides into the transport pockets on


the car using the sliding clamp and hoist.

Always control that the installation hoist


diverter can rotate on its axle and line up
with the lifting point.

a1126bpa.wmf
Secure the guides using the securing chain
on the roof of the car.
2.

a1126bpb.wmf

3. Refit the hoisting hook to the car.


4. Drive the car up to the next guide rail joint. 1-1,5 metres below the joint
Engage the safety gear and fit the parking
5. Keep the chain tightened.
chain.
6. Disconnect the hoist hook from the car.
7. Lift the rails into position in the normal manner using the sliding clamp.
8. Fix the guide rail to the fish plate. Keep the guide in position using G -clamp.
Align the joint using a 1 metre straight Do not rest the car on the safety gear
9.
edge /spirit level and tighten the joint. during the alignment.
Move the car up and park it at a comfortable working height to install the next ring of
10.
brackets.
Refer to the bracket installation section 9.1
11. Install the next ring of brackets.
on page 90.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_12.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 103

a1126cs.wmf
a1126cr.wmf
7.

5.
2.
a1126bo.wmf

8.

a1126di.wmf

9.
a1126di2.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_12.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 104

13 INSTALLATION IN TOP OF THE LIFT WELL

Chapter Heading Page


13.1 Installation of the topmost guide rails 104
13.2 Machinery installation 106

The main updated items of this chapter compared to issue B are:


– The positions of the topmost guide rail brackets in accordance with the guide rail joints are
added.
– The machinery transportation is before dismantling the topmost guide rail.
– Removing the transport protection folios of the brakes is added.
– A tool is added to keep the aligning pin in position when installing the machinery onto the
topmost guide rail.
– Installation of the counterweight rope hitch.
13.1 Installation of the topmost guide rails

Install the topmost guide rails


Step Action
1. Install the topmost guide rails.
2. Install the second topmost guide rail fixing brackets.
3. Align the guide rails to the plumb wires.
4. Remove the plumbing jig.

Install the topmost guide rail brackets


Step Action Note
Install the topmost guide rail brackets. Mark the position of the combination guide rail
fixing.

1.

np100s11.wmf

Align the guides with the 1 metre straight edge


2. Check the DBG.
and alignment tools.
Check that the car floor can reach the topmost
3. floor level with minimum clearance of 100 mm This prior to the machinery transport.
between the diverter pulley and the hoist body.
4. Mark the guide position on the second topmost fixing.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_13.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 105

1., 2., 3. and 4.

1.,2. and 3. a1126eq.wmf

G
DB
a1126eu.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_13.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 106

Check the guide rails after all guides are installed


Step Action Note
When all the guides have been installed and aligned, recheck the fish plate joints, shim
1.
them as necessary and dress the joints using the surform file.
Align the topmost brackets and guides with a straight edge, (minimum length of the
2.
straight edge /spirit level is 1,5 metres.
3. Recheck the fish plate joints. Shim as necessary.
4. Dress the joints using the surform file.

13.2 Machinery installation

Prepare the machinery and car for transportation


Step Action Note
1. Drive the car to the lowest level.
Bridge the gap between the car and landing. Use plywood board or two 50 mm x 100 mm
thick pieces of wood.
If the clearance between the hoist and diverter pulley is critical (page 104), raise the car
floor level by building a platform.

2.

a6611gi.wmf

a1126hs.wmf

Turn the machinery box on its side.


3. Use your legs while lifting -- not your
back.

041.wmf

Fix the axles and wheels to the box. Fix the tyres with the air valves facing to
4. Draw the sleeves on the axles to position the box, so the securing pin will not dam-
the tyres. age the valves.
Guide the box using the site trolley handle. Whenever the box is stationary, especially
5. Avoid moving the box over uneven or during transportation in the car, wedge the
bumpy surfaces. wheels using timber blocks.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_13.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 107

a1126di.wmf a1126hrd.wmf
Shims

Shims

a1126fj.wmf

Air
valve

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_13.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 108

Transport the machinery and controller


Step Action Note
Place the machinery and the controller cab- One fitter drives from the car top.
1. inet inside the car (the controller cabinet Do not damage the car interior or car top
can also be located on top of the car). equipment.
The hoist may not be closer than 100 mm
Drive the car to the highest floor level and from the diverter pulley. If necessary,
2. bridge the gap between the car and landing unload at the second highest floor level and
as before. bring the machinery from there to the land-
ing floor for the guide rail fitting.
3. Bring the machinery box and controller cabinet onto the landing.

Dismantle the top guide rail for machinery fixing


Step Action Note

Park the car below the topmost guide rail


1.
point.

Remove the topmost combination guide


2. rail fixing and guide rail.
Lift these to the top landing.
a1126ep.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_13.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 109

a1126ga.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_13.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 110

Unpack the machinery


Step Action Note

1. Unscrew the package top lid fixing screws.

2. Remove the package top lid.

a4544bb.eps

Pre-assemble the bottom stand


Step Action Note

Isolation

Press the isolation into the bottom stand


1.
recess.

a4544bd.eps

Fit the bottom stand to corresponding


recess on the machinery.

2. Secure the assembly using two hand tight-


ened G-clamps.
NOTE: Big G-clamps may have to be
reversed.
a4544cd.eps

Clean the machined surfaces on the bottom


3.
stand and top fixing console.

Remove transport protection folios from


4.
the brakes.
a4544be.eps

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_13.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 111

Install the top guide rail to the machinery


Step Action Note

Support frame

Step 1

a4544cf.eps Step 2

BOTTOM STAND

Hand tighten the fixing bolts.


Knock in the aligning pins.
Use open end of 13 mm spanner to keep
the pin in position without hurting your fin-
gers.
1. Tighten the fixing bolts.
Secure the fixing bolts by bending up the
lock plate corners.
1. Bolt M12 x 40 DIN933-8.8A3G
2. Lock pin 13 x 40 DIN1481
3. Lock plate 616289H01
4. Lock plate 650835
5. Wedge washer 14 DIN434-A3G
TOP FIXING CONSOLE
1
Hand tighten the rail clip bolts.
Align the guide rail in the centre of the sup-
port frame.
2
Tighten the rail clip bolts.
2. Secure the rail clip bolts by bending up the 5
lock plate corners. 3
1. Bolt M12 x 30 DIN933-8.8A3G a4544bg.eps
2. Lock plate 616289
4
3. Rail clip 85679
4. Nut M12 DIN934-8A3G
5. Lock pin 5 x 30 DIN1481

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_13.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 112

Install the machinery in the lift well


Use the manual chain hoist (500 kg minimum capacity).
Step Action Note
1. Position the car roof at floor level.
Attach the manual hoist onto the machin-
ery lifting eye.
Topmost bracket
NOTE: Lift only from the lifting eye on
2.
the top of the machinery.
For safety reasons it is forbidden to use
an electrical hoist for the final positioning
of the machinery. Lifting eye

Fix the shortenable chain to the machin-


ery to enable guidance of the machinery
during the lifting.
3.
Carefully lift the machinery into the lift
well using the chain hoist.
Guide the lifting with a rope.

NOTE: Work from the landing.


Install and align the top guide rail to the
4. fish plate and the second topmost bracket
according to the position marks. Second topmost bracket
5. Remove the G-clamps.
Raise the car slightly so that the top guide
6. shoes are a little above the second top-
most bracket.
7. Remove the manual chain hoist. Marking
8. Install and align the topmost bracket.
After installing the machinery, control the
9.
guide rail alignment.

Protect the machine from dust, if drilling


10.
the wall.
a4544al.eps

Install the counterweight rope hitch between the combination guide rail and the counter-
weight guide rail.

11.

a1126me.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_13.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 113

ua1126et.wmf

a1126es.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_13.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 114

14 CAR SILL INSTALLATION

Step Action Note


Set the car front returns temporarily in
1. position. Mark the place of the door clear- Refer to the layout drawings.
ance LL on the platform.
Level and fix the sill brackets to the plat-
2.
form.
3. Fix the L-brackets to the sill brackets. Leave bolts hand-tight.
Align the sill profile.
Leave a 35 mm space between the profile
Central opening door: centralize the sill
and the car floor and a 32 mm space
profile.
4. between the car sill profile and the landing
Side opening door: the sill profile overlaps
sill profile (the aluminium profile is not on
45 mm over the door clearance LL on the
either of the sills).
slam post side.
Use a 10 mm wrench with a 150 mm exten-
Fix the steel profile to the L-brackets and
5. sion piece. For the proper location, refer to
tighten the bolts.
the layout drawing.
Check that the sill profile and finished car Set the nuts as in step 3.
6.
floor are at the same height. Tighten the bolts to final tightness.
a6611ig.wmf
7. Remove the front returns.

/2
LL

Fix the female eyebolt to the platform


8. edge, if landing doors are transported under
the car sill (see page 122).

Timber frame
Car sill
Build a timber frame on the car floor for Cardboard
9.
landing door transportation.

a1125la.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_14.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 115

2.

LL
3.

a6611ek.wmf
a6611da.wmf

4.

5.
DD

45
35

LL
32

a6611em.wmf

LL
a6611id.wmf

6. Sill profile overlaps 45mm


4.

a6611ej.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_14.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 116

15 ADV LANDING DOOR INSTALLATION

Chapter Heading Page


15.1 Landing door installation 118
15.2 Alignment of the door 128
15.3 Alignment of the door panels 128
15.4 Panels and strips installation 132

The main changed items in this chapter are:


– The door brackets are changed
– An other reiling type is added.

NOTE: Remember to install the car front walls and car door before fitting the last landing door.

Special considerations for stainless steel doors


Note
Do not cause any deformations in the panels.
Any defects will be highlighted by the highly reflective stainless finish and are impossible to rec-
tify.
Pre-drill holes for the self drilling screws.
While installing take the protective plastic from sheet metal joints. Keep the visible surface of the
doors protected as long as possible.
Cut the stainless steel parts with hacksaw, avoid using angle grinder or scissors.
Use an approved stainless steel cleaner for final polishing of stainless steel surfaces.

Unpack and sort the components


Step Action Note
Take care not to twist the panels or damage
1. Off-load and unpack the doors.
the corners of the frames.
Mark which door frames are for designated Refer to the layout drawings for landing
2.
floors. door cut out positions.
Place the closing weight tubes inside the uprights and tie them with cable ties to the slam
3.
post stiffeners.
4. Check the packing contents. Refer to the delivery list.
Check that the sill bracket combination Refer to the GA dimensions, the actual
5. provided is suitable for the finalised floor construction and APPENDIX 1. Sill and
construction. top bracket variations.
6. Fix the top fire trims to the frame doors (when fire rated).
Check that the clear opening width of the
door is correct at sill level. For the door frames with the temporary
7. The accepted tolerance is ±1 mm. upright for the MonoSpace control cabinet
Use hammer and wooden block to adjust if the width is LL + 7 mm.
necessary.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_15.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 117

3.

a31265bo.wmf

Self-drilling screws
6.

a1125jm.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_15.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 118

15.1 Landing door installation

Install the door brackets


All sill brackets must be installed at all landings before starting to lift the landing doors in posi-
tion. This enables efficient lifting and installation work.
Step Action Note
Mark the car sill center line (CL) to the
wall. Draw a horizontal line 1 meter above
Make sure that the final flooring is known.
FFL (FFL/1,0 meter mark). Mark out the
1. Refer to layout drawing for MAX after
bracket positions LL/2-75. Drill a hole and
casting.
align the first bracket. Mark out the other
bracket positions and drill the holes.
2. Install the opposite bracket and align it with spirit level.
3. Install the middle bracket and adjust it to the height of spirit level.
4. Measure distance between the FFL/1,0 meter mark and the bracket.
Tighten the screws slightly. Adjust the tilt of brackets and finally tighten the screws. Fix
5.
the coach bolts and the nylon washers.
Mark the top bracket fixing height to the FFL 1000 mm - HH2100 mm + 320 mm =
wall. Measure the distance from FFL mark. 1330 mm. If the doors are of extended front
6. Mark the car sill center line to the wall. type, install the beams using the car sill as
Mark out the bracket positions LL/2. Drill reference. When installing front top beam
the holes and install the brackets. refer to page 121.
It may be necessary to move the brackets a
Tighten the screws slightly. Adjust the tilt little upwards when landing the door on the
7. of brackets and finally tighten the screws. brackets. This makes the installation of the
Fix the coach bolts. door easier and reduces fall of concrete
dust onto the top tracks.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_15.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 119

1. LL 1.

CL 12 mm

LL/2 -75 LL/2 -75


M12
a1125l.wmf a1125bk.wmf

Coach bolt and Coach bolt


nylon washer

a1126mf.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_15.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 120

Fix the top beam (front version with top extension panel)
Step Action Note
Fix the side brackets to the horizontal The bracket with round holes is fitted to the
1.
beam. slam post side (side opening door).
Refer to the delivery documents for further
2. Fix the horizontal beam to the side walls.
information.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_15.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 121

Top beam

Slam post side

Landing sill line


a31265ag.wmf
C

a31265aq.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_15.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 122

Transport and lift the doors


Step Action Note
Take care when handling the larger panels
1. Transport the doors using the site trolley. that the frames do not twist while they are
unsupported.
2. Use timber to protect the doors during transportation and storage.

Lift and fix the door


Leave one of the landing doors uninstalled until the car front walls and the car door operator
have been installed.
Step Action Note
Lift the doors into position using one of the
site requiring/corresponding method. Use Fix the chains properly.
Lifting method 1. on page page 124, Lift-
ing method 2. on page page 124, Lifting
method 3. on page page 126 or Lifting
method 4. on page page 126 depending on
the site requirements.
1. The door is landed upon the timber pieces Always control that the installation hoist
on the car sill. diverter can rotate on its axle and line up
The door lock rollers must be clear above with the lifting point.
the car roof panel.
When the door sill is resting upon the car Always push the door back against the car
sill, push the door frame back and centre and make sure that there is enough clear-
the landing door so that the travel will be ance for free travelling upwards.
unobstructed.
Level the landing sill with the landing sill DO NOT PUT YOUR FINGERS
brackets. BETWEEN THE SILL AND THE
BRACKETS!
Slide the door upon the brackets one side at
the time.
2. Do not use the hoist to lift the door from
the car sill to the landing.
Walk one side of the landing sill at the time
over to the landing brackets on the coach
! C
bolts on the landing. a31265ax.wmf
Align the sill using the car sill and LL When the car sill aluminium profile is not
marks as reference.
3. fitted, use 32 mm as the sill to sill clear-
Ensure that the door is located securely on ance.
the brackets.
4. Hand tighten the sill bolts.
Fix the top bracket to the door header. Refer to the GA drawings and to the actual
Use the wall bracket extension box for construction for correct positioning of the
5. ADV door with controller cabinet, when brackets. See APPENDIX 1. Sill and top
the lintel height (LA) is 370mm or 470mm. bracket variations.
6. Fix the brackets to the wall.
CHECK THE ALIGNMENT OF THE If the rail alignment is not correct, loosen
7. TOP TRACK RAIL AND THE the coach bolts and adjust the top track.
BRACKET.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_15.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 123

1. Side opening Centre opening

a1126gp.wmf
a1126gq.wmf

1.

a31265ao.wmf

5.

a31265bj.wmf

8.

a31265bz.wmf a31265ay.wmf a31265ah.wmf a31265bl.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_15.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 124

Lifting method 1. Front doors


Step Action
Fix the 1,5 metre long lifting chain to the hoist hook. Fix the shortenable chain ends to the
1. landing door. Always control that the installation hoist diverter can rotate on its axle and
line up with the lifting point.
2. Raise the landing door to the lift well. Avoid any damage.
3. Place the landing door protection.
4. Lower the landing door to the car sill.
5. Attach the landing door to the structural ring and disconnect the hoist from the door.
6. Attach the hoist hook to the car.
7. Raise the car to the required landing.
Do not use the hoist to lift the door from the car sill to the landing.
8. Walk one side of the landing sill at the time over to the landing brackets over the coach
bolts on the landing.

Lifting method 2. Frame doors


Step Action
Fix the 1,5 metre long lifting chain to the eyebolt in the front of the car platform and
1. attach that in the middle of the shortenable chain.
Fix the shortenable chain ends to the landing door.
2. Raise the car so that the landing door follows the car to the lift well. Avoid any damage.
3. Place the landing door protection.
4. Lower the car so that the landing door sits on the landing sill brackets.
5. Hold the landing door from landing side and disconnect the chain from the car sill.
6. Lower the car and start to drive the car from the car roof.
7. Move the landing door onto the car sill.
8. Raise the car to the required landing.
Do not use the hoist to lift the door from the car sill to the landing.
9. Walk one side of the landing sill at the time over to the landing brackets over the coach
bolts on the landing.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_15.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 125

Lifting method 1. Front doors a1126kf1-4.wmf

Lifting method 2. Frame doors a1126kc1-4.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_15.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 126

Lifting method 3. B -side frame and front doors


Step Action
Fix the 1,5 metre long lifting chain to the eyebolt in the rear of the car platform and attach
1. that in the middle of the shortenable chain.
Fix the shortenable chain ends to the landing door.
2. Raise the car so that the landing door follows the car to the lift well. Avoid any damage.
3. Place the landing door protection.
4. Lower the car so that the landing door sits on the rear landing sill brackets.
5. Hold the landing door from landing side and disconnect the chain from the car sill.
6. Lower the car and start to drive the car from the car roof.
7. Drive the car to the required landing.
Do not use the hoist to lift the door from the car sill to the landing.
8. Walk one side of the landing sill at the time over to the landing brackets over the coach
bolts on the landing.

Lifting method 4. Frame and front doors, when the access floor is above basement
Step Action
1. Bring the car below the entrance landing. Engage the safety gear.
2. Remove the hoist hook from the car roof.
Attach the door to the hoist hook. Always control that the installation hoist diverter can
3.
rotate on its axle and line up with the lifting point.
4. Lift the door to the lift well.
5. Lower the door to the car door sill.
6. Attach the hoist hook to the car.
7. Drive the car to the required landing.
Do not use the hoist to lift the door from the car sill to the landing.
8. Walk one side of the landing sill at the time over to the landing brackets over the coach
bolts on the landing.

Lifting method 5.lifting of the top most landing door when the head room is limited
Step Action
1. Bring the door on the car sill to suitable height.
2. Connect manual hoist to the hook on top of the landing door centre line.
3. Attach the manual hoist hook to the door lifting chain.
4. Raise the door on the landing sill brackets.
5. Continue the installation as normally.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_15.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 127

Lifting method 3. B -side frame and front doors a1126kd1-3.wmf

Lifting method 4. Frame and front doors, when the access floor is above basement

a1126ke1-3.wmf

a1135kr.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_15.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 128

15.2 Alignment of the door

Align the door frames


Step Action Note
Align the door frame at sill level. .

1. 30mm
Correct sill gap is 30 mm.
a1125kx.wmf
2. Tighten the sill fixing bolts.
Align the door frame at lintel level. Heavy duty:
3. Correct distance from car sill to the landing 86mm
top track rail is 55 mm.
Set and tighten the top fixing bolts.
4. Refer to the delivery for reinforcement 55mm
brackets.

5. Remove the lifting strap and eyes. Car sill


a1125ky.wmf

15.3 Alignment of the door panels

Preparations
Step Action Note
Untie the closing weight and make sure the
The closing weight must move freely in the
1. tube is vertically straight and aligned with
tube.
the closing weight rope.
Glue the self adhesive buffers to the lead-
The glue will not bond at temperatures
ing panel edge, one 40 mm down from the
2. below 0 oC. If necessary, warm up the door
top and the other 40 mm up from the bot-
panel before gluing.
tom.

Check the panel alignment


Fine adjust the position of the door panel using the panel top fixing adjustments, sliding shoes
and synchronisation rope adjusting screw.
Step Action Note

5mm 5mm
Set the gap between the door panel and
1.
the sill to 5 mm.
a1125lq.wmf
2. Set the door closed gap at the leading edge to 4 mm.
3. Open the doors and align the door panels vertically with the uprights.
Set the gaps between the door panels and uprights to 5 mm using the panel top fixing
4.
adjustments.
Set the gaps between the door panels and between the door panels and uprights to 5 mm
5.
using the sliding shoe adjustments.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_15.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 129

a31265bt.wmf

a31265bd.wmf
C

2.

a31265ap.wmf

5mm
2. 4.
5mm
5mm
5mm

a1129ck.wmf 5mm

5.

a1129bs.wmf a1125lr.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_15.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 130

Check the door settings


Correct and adjust the deviations if necessary.
Step Action Note
1. Top track rail must be vertically straight. Refer to the page 122.
Anti-tip roller should touch the underside of rail without causing any friction.
ADV a1129bw.wmf AMD

2.

plastic roller rubber roller steel roller


3. Synchronisation rope tension should be correct.

Hanger plate should touch the stop buffer


4.
in the top track (door closed position).

a1129cl.wmf
5. Play between the lock hook and the beak should be 2 mm.
6. Overlap of the lock hook and the beak must be 11....13 mm.
Engagement between the lock bridge and contact must be 3 mm.
7.
Lock bridge pins must go in the centre of the lock contacts.
8. The gap between the door panel and the sill in the door open position should be 5 mm.

Check the door operation and appearance


If necessary, repeat the Check the door settings .
Step Action Note
Check the appearance of the door from the
1.
landing side.
2. Door panels should move smoothly.
3. Door should not make any abnormal noise.
Closing weight must close and lock the
4.
door from any position.
5. Emergency key must release the door.

6. Emergency key mechanism must not stick.


a1125ge.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_15.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 131

3.
10 mm

5 mm

a1126nc.wmf

7.
3 mm
a1125gd.wmf

11-13 mm

2 mm

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_15.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 132

15.4 Panels and strips installation

Install the side extension panel (front version only)


Step Action Note
Side extension panels must be installed
1. Slide the side extension panel into position.
before the cover strips.
Do not fix the corner angles yet. Do not fit
Fix the panel to the door frame using self-
2. the rock wool insulation yet. It must be fit-
drilling screws.
ted after the cover strips are installed.

Install the top extension panel (front version only)


Step Action Note
1. Fit the joining strip to the top rear return of the ADV door lintel.

Lift the top extension panel into place from


2.
the landing side.

a1125jq.wmf
3. Fix the top extension panel to the joining strip using self-drilling screws.
4.
Secure the top extension panel to the lift
4.
well side walls using the corner angles.
a1125ie.wmf

Install the backing strips for wall gaps (front version only)
IMPORTANT: The backing strips must be fitted now, not after the rock wool insulation.
Step Action Note
Make sure that the concrete is smooth
1. behind the cover strips. Check especially Scrape any extra material away.
the top and bottom corners.
Cut the strips short enough to get finger
2. Leave about 100 mm space at each end.
gaps.
Check that the edge of the trim is hand-
3. Fit the backing strip.
tight against the raw opening.
4. Drill to the frame using the self-drilling screws.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_15.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 133

1. 2.

a1125cc.wmf a1125gh.wmf a1125gg.wmf

3.

a1125gf.wmf a1125fz.wmf
.
2. 3.
100 mm 100 mm

a1125agb.wmf a1125agc.wmf

4.

a1125dp.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_15.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 134

Install the cover strips (front version only)


IMPORTANT: The cover strips must be fitted now, not after the rock wool insulation.
Step Action Note
1. Fix the cover strips one at a time. Install the top piece first.
Cut the lower part of the side cover strip so
Cut the side cover strips to suit the door
2. that the joint aligns with the top extension
height.
panel line.
3. Push the cover strip over the backing strip. Use a wood block and hammer, if needed.
Correct any misalignment between the
4. front extension panels and the door Use a wood block and hammer, if needed.
uprights.
Secure the side cover strips using the lock-
5. Refer section A - A.
ing screws in the back of the frame.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_15.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 135

Top cover strip

Side cover
a1125aga.wmf strips

A A

A A

B-B
A-A
a1125dr.wmf a1125dla.wmf a1125ih.wmf

a1125if.wmf

a1125ig.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_15.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 136

Install the fire trims (frame version only)


Step Action Note
1. Fix the fire trims to the door frame using self-drilling screws.
Bend the straight fire trim back against the The corner cut out in the fire trim is for the
wall to close the wall gap. top track bracket.
2.
The fire trims must overlap the rock wool The trim edge holds the rock wool in posi-
on the “non slam post” side. tion.
3. Fix the fire trims to the wall using nail anchors.

Fire trim installation of the lowest landing door


Step Action Note
The safety area will remain since the bot-
1. Remove the car buffers.
tom pulley beam is not installed.
2. Drive the car down close to the buffer base.
3. Install the fire trims starting from the top of the door.
4. Raise the car. Enter the pit and reinstall the buffer.
Working from the work stool and the landing, install the lower part of the fire trims to the
5.
door.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_15.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 137

2./3. 1.
2./3.
1. 2./3.

a1125jw.wmf a1125cr.wmf a1125co.wmf a1125cp.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_15.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 138

16 INSTALLATION OF THE CONTROLLER CABINET AT THE TOPMOST LANDING


DOOR

Preparation
Step Action Note
1. Remove the cabinet door.
2. Protect the door against damage while it is off.
Fix the cabinet top trim using self drilling Frame version only. The back edge of the
3.
screws. trim must go along the cable entry line.
Fix the vertical top trim using self drilling
The upper edge of the vertical top trim
4. screws to the cabinet outer side wall and
must overlap the cabinet top by 30 mm.
extension box wall.

Assemble the top extension box (front version only)


Step Action Note
1. Remove the insulation from the cabinet top extension box.
2. Align the box to the cabinet top.
3. Fix the box on top of the cabinet using self-drilling screws.
4. Replace the insulation in the top extension box.
5. Fit the cover to the extension box using rivets or self-drilling screws.
Fix the vertical top trim using self-drilling Front version only: The upper edge of the
6. screws to the cabinet outer side wall and vertical top trim must overlap the top of the
extension box wall. extension box by 30 mm.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_16.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 139

1. 3. 4.
30mm

a1125gf.wmf a1125hd.wmf a1125lm.wmf

3.

Load weighing device


Tachometer
Brake release

Shaft lighting
Motor supply
Brake, thermistor,
machinery stop button,
a512gt.wmf overspeed governor

Travelling cable
Alarm bell wires

Shaft bundle
a512gu.wmf Main power supply

3. 5. 6.
30mm

Cover

a1125he.wmf a1125hf.wmf a1125ho.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_16.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 140

Fix the cabinet to the landing door


Step Action Note
1. Remove the temporary support from the door frame.
2. Lift the controller cabinet into position.
Fit the top fire trim under the cabinet top
3. Frame version only.
trim.
Fix the cabinet to the door in the upper cor- A 1/4 inch wrench with a 150 mm exten-
4.
ner using spanner and extended wrench. sion piece is recommended.
5. Fix the lower corner using normal spanner.
6. Fix the cabinet top extension box to the door lintel using self-drilling screws.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_16.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 141

1. C 3.
3. 5.
C

4.

a31265g.wmf

5.

a31265f.wmf

a1125hg.wmf

4. 6.
5.

a1125hi.wmf a1125hh.wmf a1125iy.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_16.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 142

Place the fire trims for cabinet (fire rated frame version only)
Step Action Note
1. Push the top fire trim under the cabinet top trim.
2. Cut a slot in the side trim plate. (if necessary)
3. Fix the trim plate to the edge of the cabinet. Use self-drilling screws.
4. Shape the trim plate if necessary to close the gap between the door and the wall.
5. Fix the trim plate to the lift well wall. Use nail anchors.

Place the top cover strips for cabinet (front version, no top extension box)
Step Action Note
1. Reshape the backing and cover strip to fit in the wall gap.
2. Place the cover strip in the wall gap.
Press the backing strip hand tight against
3. Use self-drilling screws.
the wall and fasten it.
Push the cover strip between the wall and
4. Use a wood block and hammer, if needed.
backing strip.
5. Push the vertical top trim upwards and against the wall to close the wall gap.

Place the top cover strips for cabinet (front version, with top extension box)
Step Action Note
1. Shorten the cover strip and cut two slots to make it fit in the wall gap.
Place the cover strip into the wall gap over
2. Top overlap = 70 mm.
the top extension box.
3. Cut the backing strip to size.
4. Press it hand tight against the wall.
5. Fix the backing strip to the lintel. Use self-drilling screws.
Push the cover strip between wall and the Use a block of timber and a hammer if nec-
6.
backing strip. essary.
7. Push the vertical top trim upwards and against the wall to close the wall gap.
Fix the cover strip end to the rear of the
8. Use self-drilling screws.
cabinet top extension box.
9. Close the wall gap on the cabinet top using the remaining top cover strip.
Push the cover strip hand tight against the
10. wall and fix it to the rear of the cabinet top Use self-drilling screws.
extension box.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_16.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 143

2.
1.
20mm

3./4.
5.

a1125ix.wmf a1125hm.wmf

a1125hl.wmf

4. 2.
5.

3.

a1125ja.wmf a1125lt.wmf

2. 1.
mm
70
6.

5.

4. 3.

a1125iz.wmf

8.
7.
10.

9.

a1125ls.wmf a1125lu.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_16.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 144

Place the side cover strip for cabinet (front version only)
Step Action Note
Cut out the corner of the cover strip to fit
1. If the cabinet has a top extension box.
the top box.
2. Fix the cabinet side cover strip using self-tapping screws.

Finalise the door


Step Action Note
Fill the wall gaps of the cabinet side and Frame doors from landing side, front doors
1.
top using the soft rock wool blocks. from lift well side.
Leave the fire compartment plates and two These are fitted after the controller is
2.
soft rock wool blocks inside the cabinet. installed.
3. Refit the cabinet door.
Check that the cabinet door lock operates
4. correctly (openable by key only, locks Lubricate if necessary.
automatically when door is closed).

IMPORTANT: All fire trims must be installed in accordance with this instruction otherwise the
fire certification is invalid.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_16.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 145

1.

2.

a1125jt.wmf

Frame door Front door

a1125ka.wmf a1125kb.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_16.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 146

17 CAR FRONT

17.1 Front wall installation

Note: Remember to install the car front walls and car door before fitting the last landing door!

Install the sill profile, toe guard, front wall panels, lintel and door brackets
Step Action Note
Place the aluminium sill groove profile on ADV1: To the centre.
top of the steel profile. ADV2: 20 mm overlap on slam post side.
1.
Refer to the holes in the toe guard to find
Fasten the toe guard clips to the sill.
right positions.
All front return parts must be placed before
the screw joints are finally tightened. This
Fix the front wall panels; first the upper
2. is done to avoid misalignments.
end and the side, then the lower end.
Front panels wider than 300 mm are fitted
in the same way as the corner pieces.
Fix the operator brackets, lintel and front
3. Use M8 bolts.
panels together.
The lower fixing position is for the prefit-
ted floorings (thickness 6 mm).
For other floorings, check the door clear-
Before tightening the M8 bolts, locate the
4. ance and the flooring thickness. Lift the
lintel to the lower fixing position.
lintel until the clearance between it and the
sill corresponds to the nominal entrance
height (HH) if needed.
Use M6 bolts.
Fix the lintel and door operator brackets to Tighten the door operator brackets really
5.
the roof. tightly to prevent any loosening during the
operation.

1. LL

20 LL

a6611cm.wmf

a6611ik.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_17.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 147

a6611hna.wm
FL/FR<300 FL/FR>300
2.

a6611ep.wm

a6611eo.wm
a6611bg.wm

ADV1: Central opening door


ADV2: Side opening door AMD Car doors
ADV1 Y
ADV2 Car sill line

a31267ek.eps
a6611bh.wmf

Check in the layouts

ADV1
Central opening
4. ADV2
Side opening
4xM6x16 HH+362mm

M8 M6x16
a6611bl.wmf

3.
a6611bj.wmf
M8x16 M6x16

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_17.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 148

Install the slam post, compensative lintel and carpet profile


Step Action Note
1. Fix the slam post to the front wall using the bolts.

(A) Fix the spring to the bracket using the


screw.
(B) Insert the spring to the groove of the
2. sill and fix the bracket to the slam post
using 2 pop rivets.
(C) Check the alignment in LL direction C
and tighten the screw.

a6611ie.wmf

Fix the compensative lintel to the slam post


3.
and lintel using rivets.

a6611dm.wmf

Make sure that the car door entrance is


square and in plumb. A misaligned entrance may cause problems
4.
Tighten all the fixing bolts to final tight- when installing the door operator.
ness.
Place the carpet profile on top of the alu-
5.
minium sill groove.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_17.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 149

6.

8.

a6611er.wmf

5.

a6611im.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_17.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 150

18 CAR DOOR INSTALLATION

Chapter Heading Page


18.1 Fixing the car door operator 152
18.2 Door panel installation and settings 154
18.3 Operation check 158
18.4 Installation of the curtain of light 160
18.5 Car door electrification 164

The main updated items of this chapter compared to issue B are:


– The heavy duty door operator is added.
– The installation of the curtain of light is added.

Note: Remember to install the car front walls and car door before fitting the last landing door!

Store the parts in the original package (plastic wrap) unpacked until the installation begins.
The car door operator is pre-adjusted at the factory. No other mechanical adjustments other than
those mentioned in this instruction are required at site!
The main components of the AMD car door

Door control
Door gear

Drive 1 or 2
Hanger
plates

Coupler

Door
panels

Door guide

Sill + toe guard

A31267ce.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_18.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 151

Main parts of the door operator


Permanent magnet DC-motor with reduction gear
Linear tooth belt drive mechanism
Fully mechanical coupler
Electronic controlled closing force limiter
Continuous position and speed feedback
Close end position switch

Main parts of the ADV car door


Door operators: Side opening Centre opening
Drive belt Door control
Door gear
Synchronisation rope

Coupler
Fast Coupler
hanger
plate
Hanger
plates
Top track
Slow Top track
hanger plate Fast door
panel
Door
Slow door panels
panel

Guide
shoes
Sill + toe guard

a1129bj.wmf a1129bi.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_18.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 152

18.1 Fixing the car door operator

Unpack and transport of the door operator


Step Action Note
1. Unpack the door operator from the packing just before transporting to the car front.
Use site trolley to transport the operator. Be Use proper lifting techniques and gloves to
2.
careful not to twist the mechanics. protect your hands.

Fix the door operator


Step Action Note
1. Hang the operator on the top fixing screws.
2. Attach the lower fixing screws.
Control the horizontal position of the top
3. If the spirit level does not fit on top of the
track.
track rail, measure from the top of the oper-
Control the vertical position of the top
4. ator. Correct positioning is crucially impor-
track.
tant to the door ride quality.
5. Tighten the door operator fixing screws.
Check that the door operator rail has a 55 max.1mm
mm clearance to the landing sill.
ADV AMD
max.1mm
HH + 254

6. 55mm
30

a1129br.wmf
a1129bf.wmf
a31267k

7. Fix the curtain of light. Refer to the delivery.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_18.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 153

a1126gs.wmf

ADV 1.

AMD

a1129bn.wmf

A31267eb

2. & 3.
AMD
ADV

A31267ec

a1129bo.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_18.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 154

18.2 Door panel installation and settings

Prepare the door panel


Step Action Note
Install the adjustable fixings slightly tight-
1.
ened on the door panels.
Glue the self-adhesive buffers to the lead-
ing panel edge, one buffer to 40 mm down The glue will not bond at temperatures
2. from the top and the other 40 mm up from below 0oC. If necessary, warm the area in
the bottom. the door up with your hand.
The leading edge is the wider one (40 mm).

Install the door panels


Step Action Note
Open the hangers and put in the slow door
1.
panel in position onto the sill.
Close the hangers and attach the door panel The adjustable fixings are pre-adjusted at
2. to the slow hanger. Tighten the screws the factory to give a space of 5...6 mm
slightly. between panel and sill.
3. Open the hangers and put in the fast door panel in position onto the sill.
Close the hangers and attach the door panel Make the door closed gap at the leading
4. to the fast hanger. Tighten the screws edge 4 mm.
slightly.

Fix the rope for opening device, if optional


emergency opening device (German
TRA200 norm.) is delivered. Fix the basic
5.
assembly group to the coupler with car
door lock. Fix the rope to the car door
panel.

a1129ca.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_18.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 155

a1129cd.wmf
1. 2.
40mm

a1129bh.wmf

40mm

a1129bk.wmf
a11 2 9 cd .w m f

a1129bp.wmf
a1129bq.wmf

a1129bm.wmf
max. 6 mm

min. 10 mm
5

a31267qm

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_18.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 156

Check the door panel alignment


Fine adjust the position of the door panel using the panel top fixing adjustment, sliding shoes
and synchronisation rope adjusting screws.
Step Action
1. Set the gap between the door panel and the sill to 5 mm.
2. Set the door closed gap at the leading edge to 4 mm.
3. Open the doors and align the door panels vertically with the car front wall return.
Set the gaps between the door panels and between the door panels and uprights to 5 mm
4.
using the sliding shoe adjustments.

Check the door settings


Step Action Note
1. The top track is vertically straight.
Anti-tip roller touches the underside of rail without causing any friction.
ADV AMD a31267sa.eps
a1129bw.wmf

2.

plastic roller rubber roller steel roller


3. Synchronisation rope tension is correct.
4. Hanger plate touches the stop buffer at the top track (door closed position).
5. Play between the lock hook and the beak is 2 mm, if there is a car door lock.
6. The door drive belt tension is correct.

There is a 1 mm clearance between the


7. toothed wheel bottom plate and the toothed
1mm

belt.

a1129bv.wmf
8. The gap between the door panel and the sill in the door open position is 5 mm.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_18.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 157

a1129lq.wmf

5mm 5mm

5mm

4mm 5mm

5mm

a1129co.wmf
4mm
a1129cn.wmf

mm
3. 100
4.
m
0m
10

a1129bx.wmf

a1129cm.wmf
3mm

6.

14mm
2mm
a1129cj.wmf a1129bu.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_18.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 158

18.3 Operation check

Check the operation of the optional car door lock


Step Action
1. Move the car between landings.
2. Shut the car doors. The lock vane should drop completely down.
Try to open by moving the door panels. The car door lock must be locked and the doors
3.
should not open.
4. Open the car doors.
5. Hold the lock vane up and push the doors closed completely.
Keep the lock vane up. Try to open by moving the door panels. The car door lock must
6.
not engage and the doors should open.
Check that the optional emergency opening device unlocks the car door lock, when man-
7.
ually pulling the rope.

Check the door performance


If necessary, repeat the checks of the paragraph: Check the door settings.
Step Action
1. The door looks defect free viewed from the car.
2. Door panels move smoothly.
3. Door does not make any abnormal noise.

Check the operation of the coupler


The coupler is pre-adjusted at factory and normally re-adjustment is not necessary.
Step Action Note
Make sure that the coupler opens and
1. Pull the toothed belt manually.
closes correctly.
Check the nominal 10...13 mm running
2. clearances between the coupler vanes and
the rollers at each landing.
Check the engagement between the coupler
The nominal engagement is 10 mm and the
3. vanes and rollers at each landing. If neces-
engagement range is 5...10 mm.
sary, adjust the landing door top fixings.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_18.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 159

Lock vane
Lock contact
Landing door rollers

s31321q.eps
Lock lever

Emergency opening rope


s31321q.eps

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_18.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 160

18.4 Installation of the curtain of light

Fix the curtain of light (if any). Refer to AM-3.17.11 for more detailed information
Step Action Note
Centre opening door: Fix both detector
parts (the transmitter and the receiver) to profile
a31711.h
the opposite ends of the sill: detector L-bracket

Fix the body to the profile using M3,5


screws and nuts (6 pcs). a31711.c

Fix the upper L-bracket to the profile (with


M8 screw and nut) and then fix the L-
bracket to the door operator.
Hand tighten screws.
Fix the lower end of the detectors to the sill
end.

a31711.f
1. a31711.ff a31711.i
a31711.ii

Side opening door:


Fix the transmitter to the front wall on the
slam post side using the clips and key that
are delivered in the plastic bag.
Fix the receiver to the sill end in the oppo-
site side as both the parts in centre opening a31711.b clamp
door. a31711b.eps
2. Adjust the detectors in vertical position in both directions.
3. Tighten all screws.
Check the running clearance of the detec-
Minimum running clearance:
tors at each landing.
4. -10 mm to landing door
Inspect the running clearance visually at
-25 mm to wall
top and bottom of the lift well.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_18.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 161

Centre opening door


Max. LL+11
from centre line HH<2100 or elevator max. speed 1,6 m/s
15

CL
35

Max. LL+41
from centre line
15

a31711.a

30 HH>2100 or elevator speed > 1,6 m/s

Side opening door

Max. LL+11 HH<2100 or elevator max. speed 1,6 m/s slam post
from centre line side
15

35

Max. LL+41
from centre line
15

a31711a.eps
30 HH>2100 or elevator speed > 1,6 m/s

a31711.d
a31711.e a31711.j
10

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_18.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 162

Route the cables of the curtain of light


Step Action Note
Avoid tight bends and sharp edges. Do not
1. Route the cables to the car roof.
overtighten the cable fixings.
Fix the cables properly using cable ties.
Ensure that cables do not hit any moving
2. Fixing accessories are supplied in the plas-
objects (e.g. door panels, landing doors)
tic bag.

Connect the cables


Step Action Note
Connect the cables as shown direct to the
1.
terminals in the door operator board.
Pos. 1. Overconnection of single beam.
2. Set the DIP switches.
Pos. 2. Set this to ON.

Drive 1 Drive 2 45 45 + 24 V
PCI
44 44 INPUT
CROSS
LCE CONNECTION
BOX
713710 G01
G
17
16
G
17
16
GND
CLOSE
OPEN
46
49
46
49
GND
+24V
PCI
OPEN 47 47 INPUT
10 10 END
30 30
REOP. 48 48 GND
IN
31 31 REOP. MSE1
NC 38 INPUT
XB28 32 32
REOP.
NO
SERV. G GND
SD SD DRIVE
OPEN 39 MSE2
4 14 14 BUTT. INPUT
2 to XB29/241 41
P. C. G GND
OUT
XB29 44 44 P. C.1
IN
1 cable which 45 45 + 24 V A31711.ll
comes with 46 46 GND
for rear door

LCE GND EXT


XB30 disconnect and 17 CLOSE
insulated
16 OPEN
10 OPEN
END
REOP.
XB31 45 46 45 44 46 30 IN
31 REOP.
NC
black=signal CURTAIN CURTAIN REOP.
A31711.l 0V beam free OF
LIGHT
car OF
LIGHT
32
SERV.
NO
black brown +24V beam cut SD DRIVE
not +24V TRANSMITTER RECEIVER 14 OPEN
BUTT.
used 41
P. C.
brown blue blue OUT
+24V 0V 0V TX RX 27 LIMIT
+24 + 24 V
GND GND EXT
28 SP0
CURTAIN CURTAIN
OF
LIGHT
car OF
LIGHT
29 SP1
11 NUD
TRANSMITTER RECEIVER GING
9 CLOSE
END
13 SE OUT
TX RX
40 POS.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_18.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 163

Centre opening door

behind operator Cable ties

Cable tie Cable tie

Side opening door


a31711.cd
Cable ties
behind operator
Cable tie

Cable tie

position 2
RECEIVER on off
on off
LENS

position 1

a31711.k

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_18.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 164

18.5 Car door electrification

Make electrical connections of the car door

Follow the safety instructions while making all electrical connections.


Step Action Note
1. Ensure that the door power supply from the controller is switched off.
Connect the door contact cable to the
Molex plug D2 87 and the separate earth Separate earthing only for countries with
2.
wire to the earth screw inside the door special regulations.
operator.
3. Connect the supply cable to the Molex plug D1 84.
Connect the control cable to the Phoenix X2 is existing, when extended I/O board is
4.
plug(s) X1 (and X2). used.
5. Route the cables to the car electrification unit.
6. Fix the cables using cable ties.

Connections of the AMD car door operator

Electronics

X5
D1
X6 X4
D2
X9

X19
X16 X18 X1 X2
Trafo X15 X17
Motor unit

a31267qe

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_18.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 165

Connections of the ADV car door operator

To the car electrification unit

Electronics

D1
X1 X2
D2

Motor unit Trafo unit


Separate earth screws

a1129a.wmf

2. 3.

87
D 1 84 D 1 84
D2 87 D2

Supply cable
Door contact cable

4. 6. Cable ties

X1 X2

Control cable

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_18.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 166

19 ELECTRIFICATION

Chapter Heading Page


19.1 Preparation 166
19.2 Signalling devices 168
19.3 Controller installation 172
19.4 Machinery electrification 174
19.5 Travelling cable installation 182
19.6 Trunking and lift well wiring installation 186

19.1 Preparation

Transport the electrification materials /Fitter 1


Step Action Note
Load the lift well trunkings, lift well light-
1. Tie the long items to the car top handrails.
ing and shaft bundle onto top of the car.
Bridge the gap between the car sill and the
landing.
2.
Load the controller and travelling cable
inside the car.

Drive the car level with the topmost land-


3.
ing floor.
a6611gi.wmf

4. Unload the controller and travelling cable onto landing.


5. Lower the car so that the car roof is level with the highest landing level.

Prepare the controller /Fitter 1


Step Action Note
1. Check that the controller cabinet has been installed at the topmost landing.

2. Take the control cabinet door off.

a512gv.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_19.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 167

a512bb.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_19.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 168

19.2 Signalling devices

Install the signalling devices /Fitter 2 at landings


Step Action Note
Check the location, type and the numbering Refer to the layout drawings and notes
1.
of position signalling devices. inside the packing.
Refer to the APPENDIX 2. Minimum hole
dimensions in masonry.
2. Make the holes, if necessary.
Avoid making too large holes for the but-
ton connectors.

Install the landing buttons to the steel door frame


Step Action Note
1. Route the cable to the lift well side.
The cable connection is always in the lower
Fix the body of the unit to the door frame part of the unit.
using the lower screw. Make sure you install it the right way up.
2.
Check location of the cables in the door Follow markings in the unit.
frame, so that you will not damage them. Use flat headed screws. Max. thickness of
the head = 2 mm.
Align the unit vertically and drill a hole for the upper screw (if needed).
3.
Tighten the screw lightly.
Push the upper end of the cover to the slots
If necessary, bend the slotted end slightly
4. in the body and snap the lower end into
inwards to make the cover to suit.
position.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_19.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 169

Topmost floor

900mm
a3911ca.wmf

UP
UP UP

a3911br.wmf a3911bs.wmf a3911aa.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_19.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 170

Install the landing signalling units


Step Action Note
1. Check the type and location of landing signalling units.
2. Route the cable to the lift well side.
Screw the body of the unit with screw to
the door frame, (do not tighten).
3. Follow the markings in the unit.
Check location of the cables in the door
frame, so you will not damage them.
4. Adjust the unit horizontally and tighten the screw lightly.
Check the direction of arrows: in the lowest
Push the hooked end of the cover to the floor up, in the top floor down and in the
5.
slots in the body and snap the other end on. middle floors the hooked end of the cover
plate to the left.

Install the key switches


Step Action Note
Refer to the APPENDIX 2. Minimum hole
If the units are installed to stone wall, it
dimensions in masonry.
1. may be necessary to cut a hole in the
Steel frame doors have premade holes for
masonry.
the signalling units.
2. Lead the cable trough the back box (if any).
Fix the body of the unit using the lower screw.
3.
Check location of the cables in the door frame, so that you will not damage them.
4. Set the unit vertically straight and make a hole for the upper screw, if needed.
5. Push the upper end of the cover to the slots in the body and snap the lower end on.

Install the (OSS) out of service switch and (OSI) out of service indication at landing
Step Action
Check the location and landing floor of the out of service switch and indicator in the
1.
delivery documents. Make openings to the door frame or wall if necessary.
2. Route the cables to the lift well side and fix the units.

Install the (PRL) priority landing calls


Step Action
Check the location and landing floor of the priority call device in the delivery documents.
1.
Make openings to the door frame or wall if necessary.
2. Route the cables to the lift well side and fix the units.

Install the (FRD) firemen’s drive switch at landing


Step Action
Check the location and landing floor of the firemens’ drive switch in the delivery docu-
1.
ments.
2. Route the cables to the lift well side and fix the units.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_19.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 171

a3911bt.wmf

s12257as.wmf
UP

a3911cg.wmf a3911aa.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_19.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 172

Installation of the handicapped display


Refer to the delivery documents

19.3 Controller installation

Place the controller in the controller cabinet


Step Action
1. Lift the lower end of the controller in to the cabinet.
Push the top of controller carefully into position.
2.
Do not damage any controller components.
3. Fix the screws and check that the controller is firmly secured.
4. Refit the cabinet door.

Connect the supply cables /Fitter 2 at the landing

Note: DO NOT CONNECT OR DISCONNECT ANY CONNECTORS WHEN THE


POWER IS ON!
Step Action Note
Make sure that the supply cable is isolated
Use your own lock to prevent any hazards,
1. and that there is no possibility that the sup-
or follow local locking off procedures.
ply can be switched on.
2. Route the supply cable inside the controller.
3. Ensure that the tails reach the terminals L1, L2, L3, N and PE.
4. Strip back the double insulation maximum 50 mm.
Connect the supply cable to the main Car light supply may have own supply
5. switch (pos. 220) connectors L1, L2, L3, cable which is connected to the terminals
PE and N. 11, PE and N.
6. Lock the main switches (220 & 262) off with your personal lock.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_19.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 173

1. 2.
3.

a512a.wmf a512gp.wmf a512ap.wmf

One riser
Lock these switches

a512gw.wmf

Two risers

a512h.wmf a512gx.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_19.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 174

19.4 Machinery electrification

Install the lift well lighting at the top of the lift well /Fitter 1 on the car roof (car in the top of the
lift well)
Step Action Note
Install the two topmost lift well lighting units 0,5 metre below the lift well ceiling.
1. Unwind the lift well lighting to wait the fixing at the same time as the shaft bundle will be
fixed.
2. Route the lift well light cable to the controller.
Refer to the layout drawing for the exact
3. Fix the KONEXION base unit on the wall.
location.
Route and fix the KONEXION cable to the Refer to the Appendix 3 and AM-13.90.1
4.
controller. for further information.
Notice the clearance to the top track.
Fix the Emergency Battery Drive unit on
5. Refer to the AM-13.30.8 for further infor-
top of the lift well wall above the door line.
mation.
Fix the option connection box (if any) on
6. Refer to the delivery documents.
the wall.

Route the machinery cables from top of the lift well to the controller
Step Action Note
Route the brake lever cable from the
Avoid sharp radii when bending the alu-
1. machine to the control panel. Use the cen-
minium tube. (Minimum radius is 100 mm)
tre top opening.
Do not fix the machinery end of the brake
Feed in the brake cable end with the alu-
2. lever cable before fitter 2 has fixed the con-
minium tube into the control panel.
troller end.
Feed in the machine, brake, machinery stop Keep the motor cable by a minimum dis-
3. button and tachometer cables through the tance of 100 mm from any other parallel
openings at the top of the control panel. cables.
4. Route and fix the wiring to the lift well wall.
5. Route and fit the tachometer cable.
6. Route and fix the overspeed governor cable to the lift well wall.
The distance between the motor cable and
load weighing detector cable must be at
Route the cable of the load weighing detec-
7. least 100 mm. Distance of the load weigh-
tor separately on the wall.
ing device cable to the door lock cable at
least 50 mm.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_19.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 175

Lift well lighting unit


Emergency battery
KoneXion Base Unit drive unit



uda1126mu.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_19.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 176

Fit the brake lever cable to the brake handle in the controller /Fitter 2
Step Action Note
Avoid sharp radii when bending the alu-
Route brake lever cable in place inside the
1. minium tube. (Minimum radius is 100
controller.
mm.)
2. Remove the locking spring and the ball joint.
3. Screw the ball joint to the end of the rope.
Connect the brake cable to the handle using the locking washer.
4.
Fix the ball point.
5. Fix the ball joint with the locking spring.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_19.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 177

2. 3.

a1126iqa.wmf
a1126iq.wmf a1126iqb.wmf

4. 5.

a1126iqe.wmf

a1126iqd.wmf
a1126iqc.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_19.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 178

Connect the machinery cables to the controller /Fitter 2


Step Action Figure
1. Connect the lift well light cable to the connector on the top of the controller.
The motor cable to the terminals on top of
the drive unit. Remember to connect the
2.
cable shield to the cover of the drive unit to
prevent disturbances.

The brake cable to the connector on top of


3.
the drive unit.
a512as.wmf

4. The tachometer cable to the connector 385A1:XG.


5. The motor thermistor cable to the connector 385A1:XT.
6. The load weighing detector cable to the connector 385A1:XS.
7. The machinery stop button cable (14) to the connector 379:XM1.
8. The overspeed governor safety chain plug to the connector 379:XM3.

The overspeed governor 24 V control volt-


age plug to the connector 375:XM12.

9. Check that the overspeed governor 24 V


control voltage 2 pin plug is in normal
position in the middle of the 4 pin connec-
tor.

a512he.wmf

Connect the cable from the KONEXION


10.
base unit to the controller. Refer to the Appendix 3 and AM-13.90.1
Insert the LCEKNX board to connector X1 for further information.
11.
on top of the LCECPU board.
12. For the connection of any optional devices, refer to delivery documents.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_19.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 179

Lift well lighting supply

Brake lever cable

Motor supply

Brake cable

Overspeed
governor control
voltage
Thermistor
XT

Tachometer
a512bc.wmf
XG

Load weighing device


XS/1 Brown
XS1/2 Green
XS1/3 Yellow
XS1/4 White
XS1/5 Black

a512ha.wmf

Overspeed governor
a512hb.wmf Machinery stop button

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_19.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 180

Install the brake lever to the machinery /Fitter 1 on the car roof
Step Action Figure

Dismantle the nuts, bushing and all springs


1. and washers at the other end of the brake
cable.

a4544bd.tif

Re-install the springs and washer and lead


2. in the brake cable through the channel on
the back of machine

a4544be.tif

Re-install the springs, washer, bushing and a4544bf.tif


end nuts on the other side.

Control that the brake is mechanically


3.
operational.

Refer to the chapter 23.6 Brake adjustment Set screw


on page 248.

Lever

End nut

a4544qc.tif Bushing

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_19.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 181

a515gr.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_19.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 182

19.5 Travelling cable installation

Fitter 1 on the car roof


Step Action Note
Feed the controller end of the travelling Be careful not to damage the connectors.
1. cables to the controller through the centre Controller end plugs are marked with XC
bottom opening of the control cabinet. and car top end plugs are marked with XT.
After fitter 2 has fixed the travelling cables
to the controller route it under the landing
2.
sill of the highest floor. Leave space for the
shaft bundle.
Make a 1 metre loop of travelling cables
3. under the highest landing sill for possible tre
maintenance purposes. 1 me a512hh.wmf

Fix the travelling cable hanger to the wall.


4. Check the location of the travelling cable
hanger in the layout drawing.
Bend the cables carefully and check that
5. the text on the cable faces the lift well
wall.
Text against
Secure the upper end of the travelling the wall
6.
cables in the cable hanger. a512ia.wmf

Unwind the travelling cables down to the lift well and fix the ends temporarily to the car
top balustrade.
7.
Check that the car ends of the cables have the text on the car side and the cable loop is
not twisted.

Fitter 2 at the landing


Step Action
Route the travelling cables into the trunking inside the controller. Do not peel back the
1.
outer cover.
2. Do not leave any extra cable length inside the controller cabinet.
3. Connect the plugs and the earthings of the travelling cables to the controller.

Both fitters together


Step Action
Unwind the travelling cable down to the lift well and check that the car top end of the
1.
cables have the text on the car side and the cable loops are not twisted.
Fix the car top ends of the travelling cables temporarily to the car top balustrade. Check
2.
that the cable is not twisted.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_19.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 183

Travelling cable
(small cars) Car top connection
box (small cars)

XC11
XC12
PE
XC3
XC4
XC1

Travelling cable
(normal)
Shaft bundle

Car top connection


box (normal)

a512hi.wmf
a512ho.wmf

Tie

a512gi.wmf
a512hk.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_19.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 184

Install the car top connection box


Step Action Note
Drill two 6 mm holes for the cable ties with
1.
clearance of the travelling cable width.
Route the travelling cables and the safety
gear switch cable up to the car roof.
2. Route also the alarm button cable from the
bottom of the car up to the kick plate side
and down to the COP.
Fix the travelling cable to the kick plate so
that the length of the larger cable inside the
car top connection box is 440 mm and the
3. smaller cable 380 mm.
Tie the travelling cable as a loop over the
kick plate so that it will not be damaged
against the sharp edges. a1126isb.wmf

Fix the car top connection box to the car Use self-tapping screws.
roof.
Locate the car top connection box depend- Leave at least 40 mm clearance between
4.
ing on the size of the car roof on the front the securing pin of the hoist and the car top
or rear side of the car roof. Draw it towards connection box so that you can remove the
the centre of the car roof, if necessary. hoist from the car roof.
Connect the travelling cable to the car top
5. Refer to the markings on the plugs.
connection board.
Connect the earth wires to the earth bar in
6. Ensure the connection tightness.
side the car top connection box.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_19.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 185

a1126isa.wmf

a512ak.wmf

a1126it.wmf XT1, XT2, XT3 and XT4

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_19.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 186

19.6 Trunking and lift well wiring installation

Fitter 1 on the car roof


Step Action Note
Check the position of the trunking in the Begin the installation from the top of the
1.
layout drawings. lift well.
2. Fix the top part of the lift well trunking.
Unpack the controller ends of the shaft bundles on the car roof. Refer to the delivery doc-
3.
uments for all the optional cables that has to be included in the shaft bundle.
4. Route the controller ends of the bundles to the controller.
After fitter 2 has fixed the bundles to the
controller, route the shaft bundle tubes
5.
under the highest landing sill and secure
them to the travelling cable fixing.
Route the tubes about 10 mm inside the
6.
vertical trunking on the lift well wall.
Tie the extra length under the landing sill if
7.
necessary.
Install the safety chain bundles first to the
8. a512ag.wmf
back of the trunking.
9. Secure the bundle to the fixing tabs with cable ties.

Fitter 2 at the landing


Step Action
1. Route the shaft bundles to the trunkings inside the controller.
2. Check that the plugs are long enough to reach the connectors in the controller.
3. Fix the tube to the bar in the bottom of the controller.
4. Connect the earth wires to earth bars.
5. Connect the shaft bundle plugs to the connectors.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_19.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 187

Shaft
lighting Car CL Shaft CL

Car CL

Travelling
cable

Shaft

a512hf.wmf
bundle
8mm

a512aa.wmf

XH12 0,5m
0,5m

XH2

XH1

0,5m
a512hj.wmf
a512ba.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_19.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 188

Both fitters on the car roof driving downwards


Step Action Note
1. Drill holes for the fixing tabs through the trunking.
Push the tabs into the holes so that the Do not fix the topmost trunking before the
2.
trunking is fixed to the wall. travelling cable is installed.
3. Fit a cable tie fixing in the end of the tab.
Drill holes for the cable fixing for the sig- 250
mm
nalling cable at the height of the landing
sills.
The maximum distance between two fix- 6.
4.
ings is 250 mm.
If there is a rear side door, drill the holes
for that at the same height as for the front
side door.

Open the cable entries for signalling and 8.


lock cables.
The floor boards are fitted to the shaft bun-
5. dle.
In case of trough type elevator, check the
correct board by looking at the jumper set-
ting on the board. 7.
a512hg.wmf

6. Drill holes for the lift well light fixing. Refer to the layout drawing.
7. Continue fixing the lift well lighting while going downwards in the lift well.

Shaft bundle (driving down)


Step Action Note
1. Install the safety chain bundles first on the bottom of the trunking.
Install the safety chain socket for the top
2. landing door lock in the trunking at height
of the topmost landing door top track. 70mm <25
0mm

Unwind the door lock cable, fix it to the


3.
wall and connect to the safety chain socket.

a512aj.wmf

4. Secure the bundle to the fixing tabs with cable ties.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_19.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 189

3.
2.

a512ah.wmf

4.

a512hp.wmf

a512be.wmf

Side selection
jumpers

a3911ch.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_19.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 190

Route the lift well wiring /Fitter 1 on the car roof


Step Action Note
1. Route the signalling cables inside the door frame.
Avoid leading the cable near the edges of
Route the signalling cables from the door fire trims which are later fixed with self-
2.
frame to the floor control boards. drilling screws. Tie back the cables after
the rock wool is fitted.

Connect the optional signalling devices to


the floor control board.
FRONT REAR
Refer to the delivery documents.

3. In case of through going type elevator,


check that you connect the back door cable
to correct floor control board. The pre-set-
ted side selection jumper (FRONT or
REAR) on the floor control board is same
as the side of each signalling device.
a512ht.wmf

4. Move the car downwards to suitable working height for each floor.
Continue installing of the safety chain shaft bundles, signalling shaft bundle and lift well
5.
lighting for each floor.
Keep the safety chain shaft bundles under the plastic protections of the signalling network
6.
floor control boards. The board must not touch the high voltage wires.

Install the (OSS) out of service switch and (OSI) out of service indication at landing
Step Action Note
Route the cables to the LCEFCB board in Fix the cable like other signalling cables
1.
the shaft bundle. for the landing devices.
Connect the OSS switch cable to the XF3 In case of through-type car, check that you
connector and the indication unit cable to connect the cable to correct floor control
2.
the XF4 connector on the LCEFCB floor board. The side selection jumper (FRONT
control board. side or REAR side) is pre-setted.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_19.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 191

a512in.wmf a512bd.wmf

OSS switch

OSI indication

a512hr.tif

a3911ch.wmf
a512hs.tif

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_19.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 192

Install the (PRL) priority landing call cables


Step Action Note
Route the cable to the separate LCEFOB Fix the cable like other signalling cables
1.
board in the shaft bundle. for the landing devices.
Connect the cable to the XF9 connector on In case of through-type car, check that you
the LCEFOB floor control board. This connect the cable to correct floor control
2.
board is 0,5 metres above or below the nor- board. The side selection jumper (FRONT
mal floor control board. side or REAR side) is pre-setted.

Install the (FRD) firemen’s drive switch cables from the landings
Step Action Note
1. Route the cable to the trunking and in the trunking up to the controller.
Connect the cable to the X5 connector on
the LCEOPT board in the controller.
LCEOPT board

For the correct pins refer to the circuit dia-


2. grams. Take the jumpering away, while
connecting the cable.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_19.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 193

LCECAN

a512ik.wmf LCEOPT
LCERAL
LCEGTW

Intercom

a512ie.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_19.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 194

Install in the pit


Step Action Note
Drill holes for the cable fixing for the ten-
sion weight switch, pit stop switch and The maximum distance between two fix-
1.
additional pit equipment (if any) in the lift ings is 250 mm.
well pit.
2. Install the lowest lift well light unit 0,5 metre above the pit floor.
Install the lighting switch next to the lift well pit ladder maximum 0,6 metre above the
3.
height of the landing sill.
4. Connect the tension weight contact cable, if not preconnected.
Fix the cable and connect to the shaft bun- The maximum distance between two fix-
5.
dle. ings is 250 mm.
Install the lift well pit stop switch near the ladder on the lift well wall maximum 0,6 metre
6.
above the height of the lowest landing sill.
7. Fix the cables and connect to the shaft bundle.
Refer to the delivery documents for the
8. Fix the intercom socket to the lift well wall.
location and connections.

Fix the travelling cable under the car


Step Action Note
1. Move the car at 100 mm below the lowest floor level.
Check that the travelling cable loops are
The inner diameter of the loop must be 400
correct and the cables are not twisted.
2. mm and the distance between travelling
The text on the cable must be in the outer
cables 100 mm.
side of the loop.
Park the car 1 metre above the lowest landing floor and ensure the parking with parking
3.
chain.
4. Fix the cable to the travelling cable hanger.
Tie the travelling cable to the platform
The minimum bending radius of the travel-
5. using a plastic covered tape, so that it is not
ling cable is 30 mm when the cable is fixed
hanging loose on the car wall.
(not moving).
Tie the rest of the travelling cable under the
6.
platform.
Install the alarm button to the travelling
7. cable hanger and route the cable to the car
roof.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_19.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 195

Max.
0,6m

a512hv.wmf

4.

2. 5. and 6.

400mm

100mm

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_19.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 196

20 INSTALLATION OF THE CAR INTERIOR

Chapter Heading Page


20.1 Installation of the panel opposite to COP inside the car 196
20.2 Installation of mirrors and handrails 198
20.3 Car ceiling installation 200
20.4 Skirting installation 210
20.5 Handicap seat installation 210
20.6 Installation of the COP 212

The main changed items of this chapter compared to issue B are:


– Installation of the handicapped COP is added
– Arrangement of the lighting units is added
– The fixing of skirting is changed
– COP installation is updated.

20.1 Installation of the panel opposite to COP inside the car

Opposite side of the COP in the car will be a cover panel or a special COP for the handicapped.
Install the cover panel
Step Action Note
1. Fit the cover panel on the upright on the opposite side to the COP.
2. Lower the cover panel on the conical nuts. The screw will be covered by the ceiling.

Install the handicapped COP


Step Action Note
Tape the installation template on the wall
1. Refer to the delivery documents.
opposite side of the normal COP.
2. Drill the fixing and cable routing holes in accordance with the template.
3. Route the cables up to the car roof.
4. Fix the handicapped COP to the wall.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_20.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 197

min
500
850±1

a6611d.wmf

s6214bd.eps

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_20.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 198

20.2 Installation of mirrors and handrails

Install the lower mirror (optional)


Step Action Note
1. 2.
1. Slide in the lower fixing springs.

a6611cc.wmf
a6611fl.wmf
Clip the lower profile on top of it.
2.
Centralise the profile sideways.

a6611fm.wmf
Peel the cover off the adhesive tape and
push the mirror onto the lower profile.
3. The mirror is not removable after it has
been pushed against the tape.

a6611fk.wmf
Be careful with the initial positioning.

Place the upper mirror profile.

a6611fn.wmf
4. The upper profile is kept in place by the
handrail supports

Install the handrails


Step Action Note

Fix the handrail supports to the wall using


5. M8 bolts.
a6611fo.wmf

The holes are pre-drilled in the wall.


a6611fq.wmf

If there is also an upper mirror, fit the sup-


port profile for that before tightening the
handrail support to the wall.
6.
Place the fixing springs in the correspond- a6611fp.wmf
ing slots (if applicable)
Slide M8 bolts into the handrail profile.
7.
8.
7.

8. Position the handrail profile in place.


a6611fr.wmf
a6611fs.wmf

9. Fit the end caps and support caps.


a6611ft.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_20.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 199

11.

6.
10.
7.& 8.

9.
9.

5. 4.

3.
1. 2.

a6611cb.wmf a6611cf.wmf

Install the upper mirror (optional)


Step Action Note
Place the upper mirror in position on the
11.
profile that is installed in step 6.

Lift the mirror in place.


10.
Peel the self adhesive tape and push the
mirror against the wall.
Be careful with the initial positioning.
11. Secure the fixing bracket. a6611eq.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_20.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 200

20.3 Car ceiling installation

Install the panel ceiling (LF 66, LF 67, LF 68)


Step Action Note
Route the lighting supply cable from the
1. Route wiring to avoid any sharp corners.
car roof to the space above the ceiling.
Bolt the two roof support profiles to the
2.
pre-installed brackets.
Lift up the two support profiles and secure Check the distance between the wall and
3.
the opposite ends. the roof support profile.
4. Clip on one of the side channel.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_20.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 201

2..

13 mm

4. 3.

a6611hg.wmf

a6611hgc.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_20.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 202

Step Action Note


Slide in each ceiling panel according to the Plug the connectors for the lighting in a
5.
layout drawing shown below. sequence.
6. Snap on the last cover channel.
Connect the supply cable to the car electri-
7.
fication box.

a6611ij.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_20.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 203

a661hga.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_20.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 204

Install the flat ceiling (LF 65)


Step Action Note
Route the lighting supply cable from the
1. Route wiring to avoid any sharp corners.
car roof to the space above the ceiling.
Bolt the two roof support profiles to the
2.
pre-installed brackets.
Lift up the two support profiles and secure As the panel ceiling (see page 200).
3.
the opposite ends.
4. Snap on the first cover channel.
Fit the lighting elements to the roof support
5.
profiles and plug in the connectors.
6. Slide the ceiling panel into position.
7. Snap on the last cover channel.

Arrangement of the lighting units

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_20.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 205

5.

6.

5.

6.

7.

a6611hj.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_20.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 206

Install the curved ceiling (LF 69)


Step Action Note
Route the lighting supply cable from the
1. Route wiring to avoid any sharp corners.
car roof to the space above the ceiling.
Fix the lighting units to the pre-installed
2.
brackets. Connect the supply cables.
Check the lighting unit position. Adjust if
3.
needed.
Slide the fixing brackets over the edge of
4. the roof panel to secure the lighting unit.
Tighten all the fixing bolts.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_20.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 207

2.

4.

a6611hh.wmf

3.

14

6 mm if the mirror is assembled

a6611hgd.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_20.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 208

Step Action Note


5. Fix the second aluminium profile to the
roof using the fixing brackets.
6. Check which side of the laminate should be
installed upwards.
7. Slide the laminate of the curve into the Take care that the laminate is pushed
groove of the lighting unit. securely into the groove.
8. Push the aluminium profile into the posi-
tion and the laminate to the groove.
9. Fix the brackets to the aluminium profile.
Check the lighting unit position (see page
Fix them to the pre-installed brackets.
206). Adjust if needed.
Tighten all the bolts.
10. Plug the cables into the lighting units.
11. Snap on the side panels.
Connect the lighting supply cables to the
12.
car electrification unit.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_20.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 209

5.
2.

6.&7.
a6611hha.wmf

8.

10. 9.

a6611hhb.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_20.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 210

20.4 Skirting installation

Fix the skirting


Step Action Note
1. Make sure that the contact surfaces are
Peel off any protective film.
clean and dry.
2. Position one plastic pieces on each panel.
3. Identify the COP side pieces, other wall
Refer to the delivered car layout.
pieces and back wall piece (if single entry).
4. Lay the skirting on the floor in front of the
fixing position.
5. Peel off the covering of the tape.
Lift up the skirting and press it firmly into
6. Take care of the ends of the skirting pieces.
place.

20.5 Handicap seat installation

Fix the handicap seat


Step Action Note
1. Fix the seat in position using M10 bolts. Fixing holes are pre-drilled and tapped.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_20.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 211

s6214ad.eps

1.

a6611ef.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_20.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 212

20.6 Installation of the COP

Display board Display and load


plate
KONEXION
Intercom

Call buttons
Second key
switch
First key
COP extension
boards switch
Alarm button
Input/output
boards

s1235aa.wmf
COP from the back COP front view

Fix the top cover to the Kiosk type COP


Step Action
1. Fix the side strips to the top part of the COP body (if applicable).
2. Fix the top cover plate to the face of the top part using self-adhesive tape.

Preparation
Step Action
1. Check that the fixing nuts are located in the upright.
In the case of adjustable fixing, set the depth of the fixing brackets to suit the depth of the
2.
upright

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_20.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 213

Kiosk type COP Fixing location:


for black
box fixing

2125
1.

for standard
fixing

1675
2.

for standard
fixing

775
189
for black
box fixing

225
floor
(unfinished)
a678ag.wmf

a6611f.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_20.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 214

Connect cables
Step Action Note
Unwind the coiled cables and route the
Check that the plugs are not damaged, no
1. KONEXION cables to the car electrifica-
loose pins, etc.
tion unit.
Route the alarm button cables and cables of Connectors XB9B for the car roof alarm
2. the second COP (if any) down from the car button and XB9C for the alarm button
top and connect to the COP. under the car on the KNX SIGKON board.
Connect the cables coming from car top
connection unit to the plugs in the COP.
Refer to the wiring diagrams in the delivery
3. Connect the cable of the second COP in
documents.
corresponding connectors in the normal
COP. Remove the end connectors.
Use the handle of the emergency opening
4. Lift the COP in place.
key.
Fix the cables to the rear before closing the
5. Use the self-adhesive cable anchor.
COP.
Close the COP by lowering it onto the
6.
brackets.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_20.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 215

4.

a678ae.w

a678ab.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_20.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 216

21 CAR ELECTRIFICATION

NOTE: Clear the unnecessary tools and materials from the car roof!

Remove the guide rail securing chains from the car roof.
Check the location and number of the car roof devices in the delivery documents. The main
principle is shown in the layout picture on the right.

Install the magnet switches on top of the car roof


Switch Magnet strip and number Magnet fixing
61:U and 61:N Impulse 120 mm long magnet for each
Single car guide rail
switches level
270 mm long magnet for each
30 Door zone switch Single car guide rail
front door
270 mm long magnet for each Separate bracket in the single
B30 Door zone switch
rear door guide rail
80 mm long magnet from 1500
77:U Deceleration switch to 1750 mm below the topmost Machinery side guide rail
floor level
80 mm long magnet from 1500
77:N Deceleration switch to 1750 mm above the lowest Machinery side guide rail
floor level
80 mm long magnet 200 mm
77:S Synchronisation switch, below the topmost floor level Separate bracket in the single
if short floor to floor distance and 80 mm long magnet 200 guide rail opposite side to final
at a terminal floor mm above the lowest floor limit switch
level

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_21.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 217

Travelling cable
(small cars) Car top connection
Synchronisation box (small cars) Trap door
switch (77:S) contact (option)
(optional)
Door zone
switch (30) Deceleration
switch (77:U)
Impulse switches
(61:U and 61:N)
Door zone switch
Final limit
for rear side (B30)
switch (51)
Travelling cable Deceleration
switch (77:N)
(normal)
Car top connection
Shaft bundle box (normal) Photo cell amplifier
Door
COL amplifier
operator

a512ho.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_21.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 218

Install the electrification on the car roof


Step Action Note
1. Fix the switch brackets to the structural ring.
2. Fix the oil lubricators to the switch bracket.
Refer to the layout drawings.

Fit the final limit switch to the switch


bracket.
3. Adjust the roller so that the minimum dis-
tance between the edge of the roller and
back of the guide rail is 10 mm.
min.10mm

a512bg.wmf
Fit the door zone switch 30 (and B30 if
there is also a rear door) impulse switches Set the distance between the magnet
4. 61:U and 61:N (and the synchronisation switches 61:U and 61:N to 130 mm to
switch 77:S if it is delivered) to the switch ensure the correct levelling.
bracket beside the final limit switch.
5. Fit the deceleration switches 77:U and 77:U on the machinery side of the car.
Route the cables along the kick plates of the balustrades and the channel on top of the
6.
structural ring to the car top connection box and tie them using cable ties.
Route the safety gear contact cable and car Pass the cable inside the profile of the
7.
bottom alarm button up to the car roof. structural ring and secure with cable ties.
8. Route the COP cables up to the car roof and alarm button cables down to the COP.
9. Route the cable of the trap door to the car top connection box
Install the KONEXION connection box on
10.
the car roof.
Refer to the APPENDIX 3. E-line KoneX-
Connect the KONEXION cable from the
11. ion and AM-13.90.1 for further informa-
COP to the KONEXION connection box.
tion.
Route the cable from the KONEXION box
12.
to the car top connection box.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_21.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 219

2.

a1135lf.wmf
a1126i.wmf

5.
5.
4.

3.

77:U

77:N

a512b.wmf a512an.wmf

4. 6.

4.

61:U
30 77:S
B30
130mm

a512am.wmf

61:N
a512al.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_21.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 220

Connect into the car top connection box


Step Action
1. Connect the earth wires to the earth bar.
2. Connect the impulse switches.
3. Connect the door zone switch(es).
4. Connect the deceleration switch.
5. Connect the synchronisation switch, if any.
6. Connect the final limit switch.
7. Connect the door operator cables.
Bring the COP cables up to the car roof and connect to the car top connection board.
8.
Route the cable of the second COP (if any) to the normal COP.
9. Connect the photo cell or Curtain of light cables.
Connect the safety gear contact cable, blocking device contact cable and all other possi-
10.
ble safety chain cables.
11. Connect the trap door contact cable.
12. Connect the ventilation and car lighting, all the optional cables.
Connect the cable from the KONEXION connection box according to delivery docu-
13.
ments, APPENDIX 3. E-line KoneXion and AM-13.90.1.

Install the provision for lift announcer


Step Action
1. Fix LCEOPT board in plastic box on the car roof.
2. Route the cable from COP to LCEOPT-board.
3. For further details refer to delivery documents.

Install the intercom socket on the car roof


Step Action Note
Fix the intercom socket to the car roof with
1. the self tapping screws that are delivered
with the socket.
Route the cable to the car top connection
2.
box.
Connect the cable to the connector XB9 on
3. Refer to the delivery documents.
the LCECCB board.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_21.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 221

30 Door zone switch


(front)
61:U Impulse switch 51 Final
limit switch
61:N Impulse switch
B30 Door zone 52 Safety
switch (rear) gear contact
77:U Deceleration
switch
77:N Deceleration
switch
77:S Synchronise.
switch (optional) Car lighting

Front door:
Door operator Stop switch
Supply rear side
Photo cell Fan
amplifier
Blocking
Rear door: device
Door operator

Supply Trap door


Photo cell
amplifier
Door contact
front

Door contact
COP rear

Intercom
a512ak.wmf
Travelling cables

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_21.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 222

Install the ramps and magnets (driving up)


Step Action Note
Fit the limit switch ramps.
1. The switch should start to operate when the car is 80 ... 100 mm below the lowest floor
level or 80 ... 100 mm above the top floor level.
Place the magnets for impulse switches
61:N and 61:U and door zone switch(es) 30
If the guide rail fixing bolts or clips inter-
(B30) in to the guide rail groove (see vane
fere with the magnet position (minimum
diagram).
clearance to bolts and clips 50 mm), place
The distance between the switch and the
2. the magnets in the groove behind the guide
magnet must be 5...10 mm.
rail blade face. These magnet switches
Install magnets for dummy floors (the floor
detect wide area. The magnets are easily
to floor distance ≥ 5 m).
damaged by shocks.
Place extra 61 magnets for each 5 metre.
Equalise the distance between magnets.
Place the magnets for the deceleration
switches 77:U and 77:N on the guide (see
vane diagram).

Remember to place the white marked side


of the lower magnet upwards and the upper
magnet downwards.
3.
If there are guide rail fixing bolts at the
required area, raise/lower the magnet, but
keep it horizontally in front of the switch.
These bistabile magnet switches have a
narrow detection area only at front of the
switch

77:S Magnet switch is needed when the ter-


minal floor distance in top or bottom of the
4.
lift well is smaller than 2000 mm. One
switch and two magnets are required.
a512hx.tif

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_21.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 223

1.
2.

Final limit switch


position, when the
80... car is at the top
100mm floor level

a512hw.tif a512hy.wmf

3.
2.

77:U
1500...1750mm

61:U 30

= 77:N

Floor level 1500...1750mm


a512bf.wmf

=
Bottom ends
at same level

61:N
77:S
Magnet fixed to the guide rail 200mm
Switch

5...10mm
77:S
Bracket

lce02.wmf 200mm

lce11.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_21.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 224

22 LANDING DOOR FINALISING

Install the uprights on slam post side


Step Action Note
Always use gloves, protect your arms and
Fill uprights with the 6 soft rock wool
1. wear dust masks when handling the rock
blocks supplied.
wool.
2. Fit the hard rock wool panel over the top.
3. Fix using the annealing wire and washers. Bend the sharp ends back into slab.

Install the uprights on non slam post side


Step Action Note
1. Cut the small 150 mm wide hard rock wool plate into 5 x 50 x 150 mm strips.
2. Fit the strips into upright.
Slide the hard rock wool plate under the Shorten the hard rock wool plate so that it
3.
top track bracket and over the strips. fits into the upright.

Install the side extension panels (front version doors)


Step Action Note
Place the two small rock wool plates inside
1. the top of the upright and inside the top of On the non slam post side.
the front side panel.
Cut the long, 70 mm thick soft rock wool pieces in halves vertically to make two 35 mm
2.
thick pieces.
3. Fit the two slabs into the non slam post side upright.
Slide the top part of the panel under the top If needed, use a carpet knife to cut the
4.
track bracket. panel to the correct size.
5. Push the inner vertical edge of the panel into the upright.
Push the outer vertical edge under the front
6. Cut the leading corner edge if necessary.
side extension panel.

Install the lintel (front versions, if HA is greater than 270 mm)


Step Action
1. Cut the third small rock wool plate into two equal pieces.
2. Fit the pieces either end of the lintel.
3. Tie the cover rock wool back with annealing wire.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_22.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 225

Hard Soft wool


wool

3.
a1125cz.wmf

1. a1125ip.wmf 2.
a1125ii.wmf

a1125it.wmf
You must install the basic rock wool insu-
3. lation shown to comply with fire ratings:
Austria F90, Germany F90 and Switzer-
land A60.
To comply with the fire ratings: Finland
a1125iu.wmf

1. 2. A60, Norway A60, Russia 1h and Sweden


A60 you must install the additional rock
wool insulation marked .
*
a1125il.wmf LA - 15 mm
Door top 140 mm

HA - 63 mm
*
HH 4. 5mm
* 4.
1.

HH + HA - 5 mm
2.
3.
* a1125ij.wmf
95 mm

5./6.
a1125dj.wmf 148 mm a1125ju.wmf

1.
*
2.

3.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_22.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 226

Fix the corner angles and wall gaps


Step Action Note
Fit the front side extension panel corner
1. angles to the lift well wall using nail Front version.
anchors.
Fill the wall gaps of the frame and front
version doors with the soft rock wool
blocks to comply with fire ratings: Finland
A60, Norway A60, Russia 1h, Sweden
Fill the wall gaps to comply with the
2. A60.
required fire rating (refer to GA drawing).
Fill the wall gaps of the frame doors with
plaster to comply with the fire ratings: Aus-
tria F90, Germany F90, Switzerland A60,
Czech EW60, Spain PF60.

Install the fire insulation for the top extension panel (front version)
Step Action
1. Cut holes in the hard rock wool plate for the top fixing profiles.
2. Fasten the hard rock wool panel to the horizontal beam using annealing wire and washers.
3. Fill the top pocket with two soft rock wool slabs.

Fire insulation installation of the lowest landing door


Step Action Note
The safety area will remain since the bot-
1. Remove the car buffers.
tom pulley beam is not installed.
2. Drive the car down close to the buffer base.
3. Install the fire insulation starting from the top of the door.
4. Raise the car. Enter the pit and reinstall the buffer.
Working from the work stool and the landing, install the lower part of the fire insulation
5.
to the door.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_22.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 227

1.
a1125cd.wmf

2. 2.

* *
1300mm
250mm

a1125dk.wmf
a1125ce.wmf a1125dl.wmf

3.
2. * 2.
* *
1. Side opening door
* *
Central opening door
a1125jd.wmf

a1125kj.wmf
a1125jf.wmf

3.
* *
You must install the basic rock wool insulation
shown to comply with fire ratings: Austria F90,
Germany F90 and Switzerland A60.
* To comply with the fire ratings: Finland A60, Nor-
way A60, Russia 1h, and Sweden A60 you must
install the additional rock wool insulation marked
a1125je.wmf

with *.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_22.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 228

Install the toe guard


Step Action Note
1. Fix the toe guard to the sill. Use the special screws provided.
If the toe guard overlaps the top track of
the next landing door, cut it on site and Use self-tapping screws and timber inserts
2.
secure it back to the door header or have for securing.
new toe guards fabricated locally.

Install the grout guard (if applicable)


Step Action Note
1. Bend and place the sill grout guard. You may need to make extra cut outs in the
Fasten it using nail anchors into the con- plate if additional anchor bolts are used.
2. Grout guards are not delivered with the
crete.
non- fire rated doors.
Seal the grout plate using tape and plastic In these cases check that the builder has put
3.
film. timber grout guards in the floor gaps.

Install the carpet profile


Step Action Note
Do not fit this before the floor finish is
installed as the profile is not removable. If
Clip the carpet profile over to the landing
1. you fit this before the floor is finished,
sill.
place an extra support under the carpet pro-
file to support it at FFL position.
2. Store the narrow carpet profile for the car sill.
Use silicone or other suitable filler to close Use extra screws to fix the carpet profile to
3. the gaps between the floor and the carpet the landing floor if the floor is exception-
profile. ally curved.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_22.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 229

2.
SHORTENED
1. TOE GUARD

SELF- TAPPING

SCREW

TIMBER

INSERT
a1125dm.wmf a1125do.wmf

1.

3.

2.

a1125g.wmf
a1125dp.wmf

FINISHED FLOOR CARPET PROFILE

a1125ir.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_22.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 230

22.1 Quality check

Step Action Note


For more detailed door quality information
Check the operation and appearance of all
1. refer to the Maintenance Standards in AS-
doors.
3.12.35 and AS-3.12.36.
Normal noise level:
-from door: 1 metre
Make sure there are no dents, scratches or -from landing: 1 metre
2.
abnormal noises. -speed level: 1 (normal)
Door moving: max. 55 dB(A)
Impulse (e.g. reopening): max. 60 dB(A)

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_22.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 231

a1125kk.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_22.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 232

23 ROPING

Chapter Heading Page


23.1 Bottom pulley beam 232
23.2 Routing the ropes 238
23.3 Parking plate and overspeed governor 244
23.4 Counterweight 246
23.5 Oil collector 246
23.6 Brake adjustment 248
23.7 Initial loading of the counterweight 254

The main updated items of this chapter compared to issue B are:


– The bottom pulley alignment is added,
– Routing of ropes is changed
– The filler bit tables are updated

23.1 Bottom pulley beam

Lower the bottom pulley beam onto the working stool


Step Action Note
Fix the eye loop in the c-profile in the mid-
1.
dle of the floor.
Fix the extension chain to the eye loop and
Check that the correct end of the pulley
2. the shortenable chain below that. Route the
beam is on to the machine side.
chain ends around the pulleys.
3. Lift the pulley beam from the pit floor.
Place the installation stool in the middle of the lift pit (on wooden blocks if the pit depth
4.
>1400 mm). Lift the pulley beam onto the stool.

MX10

Set the pulley beam so that the bolts of the


5.
buffers will align to the proper fixing holes.

MX05 and
MX06

a1126hc.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_23.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 233

a6611ha.wmf

155

195

a6611hb.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_23.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 234

Lower the car platform on top of the bottom pulley beam


Step Action Note
Fitter 1 lowers the car to about 20 mm
(Fitter 2 on the car roof.) Press the safety
1. above the pulley beam. (Pendant control
pedal while the car is lowered.
must be in the pit.)
2. Lift the other end of the pulley beam and hand-tighten the nut.
3. Lower the car.
4. Fix the other nut hand- tight.
5. Fix the pulley bumpers to the safety gear legs.
6. Tighten the pulley beam fixings.

a1126he.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_23.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 235

20 mm
a1126hd.wmf

6. 7.

a1126hda.wmf

8. 9.

a1126hdb.wmf a1126hdc.wmf

10.

MX10
MX05 and MX06
a1126hf.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_23.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 236

Align the pulley beam


Step Action Note
Place the screw and the adapter in the pul- If necessary rotate the pulley to make the
1.
ley side of the side plate. inserting easier.
The slots to be used are the one in the mid-
Insert, on the leg side, the rubber damper
dle of the leg for the motor side and the one
2. between the two wide washers and one of
placed in the back part of the leg for the
the M8 nuts.
other side.
Adjust the position of the side buffer by
3. pressing it against the side plate of the pul-
ley beam.
Tighten the M8 nut to pull the pulley beam
against the leg.
Check with a spirit level that the side plates
are vertical.
4.
The side buffer on the leg and the cylindri-
cal damper have to be pressed.
Place the second safety nut to prevent loos-
ening of the device.

The bolts between the safety gear and the bottom pulley on the machinery side

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_23.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 237

a1126ml.wmf a1126mm.wmf

a1126mn.wmf a1126mo.wmf

The bolts between the safety gear and the bottom pulley opposite side to the machinery

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_23.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 238

23.2 Routing the ropes

Lower the ropes under the car


Step Action Note
Drive the car down to the pit (position it so Take care of the toe guard support brackets
1.
that the pit can be accessed). when entering or leaving the pit.
Fix the car side rope fixing to the guide rail using a G-clamp or vise grip and 2 guide rails
2.
clips diagonally placed about one metre above the car roof.
Lower each rope one at a time down the Arrange the order of the rope coils so that
3.
side of the car. rope no. 1 is the topmost coil.
Pass the rope round the diverter pulleys Use a draw wire to pull the ropes up.
4. under the car and then back up to the car (Refer to the roping arrangement on the
roof. opposite page.)
The rope fixing has 6 holes. When you
Attach the rope end to the rope fixing on
5. have less than 6 ropes do not use the fixing
the guide rail.
holes nearest to the guide rail.
6. Repeat the steps 3., 4. and 5. for each rope.
7. Secure the rope coils on the car roof. Using cable ties, so they will not uncoil.
8. Unclamp the rope fixing. Secure it to the car roof.

VICE GRIP
GUIDE
CLIP

rope1.bmp

a1126dm.wmf
a1126gc.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_23.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 239

MX05 MX06

MX10

ua1126er.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_23.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 240

Fix the ropes to the single guide rail at the top of the lift well
Step Action Note
1. Drive the car to the topmost floor.
Install the rope fixing in to the final posi- Select the screw positions of the current
2.
tion. guide rail type as in the picture below.
3. Connect the load weighing device.
Position the car sill one metre below the
4. 0,8 - 1,0 metres.
landing sill.
5. Open the counterweight diverter pulley.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_23.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 241

MX05 MX10

MX06

a1126gh.wmf
a1126gr.wmf

a1126fh.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_23.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 242

Route the ropes


Step Action Note
1. Pass the rope no. 1 over the traction sheave.
Lower the rope as a loop down to the coun-
terweight.
Take care that the ropes do not twist around
No one is allowed in the pit until the ropes
each other.
have been anchored securely.
2. Keep them as far as possible from each
Use 2-3 kg weights to prevent ropes twist-
other.
ing.
If the loop has twisted, unturn the twist
only in the counterweight rope hitch side,
but do not turn the loop itself.
3. Fix the free end in the rope fixing.
4. Repeat the roping for each rope.
5. Close the diverter pulley

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_23.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 243

a1126gf.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_23.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 244

23.3 Parking plate and overspeed governor

Install the parking plate and overspeed governor


Step Action Note
1. Fit the parking plate to the guide rail. Align the parking plate on the fish plate.
Transfer the overspeed governor in to posi-
2.
tion in the bracket.
Fix the overspeed governor bracket to the
3. Do not install any cover - even if delivered.
guide rail.
4. Adjust the position of the bracket. Shorten the governor rope, if needed.
5. Make sure the parking pin is retracted.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_23.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 245

a1126gg.wmf

a1126gb.wmf a1126gd.wmf
a1126do.wmf

a1126ge.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_23.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 246

23.4 Counterweight

Lift the counterweight in position


Step Action Note
Install the shortenable chain around the car
1.
and counterweight guide rail brackets.
2. Attach the manual chain hoist to the chain.
800 - 1000 mm = car position
3. Lift the counterweight up in to position. 150 mm = buffer clearance
XX mm = rope stretch 1 mm/m.
Shorten the ropes in the counterweight rope
4.
fixing.
5. Dismantle the manual chain hoist.

23.5 Oil collector

Install the oil collector


Step Action Note
Slide the oil collector to the guide rail.
1.
Adjust it below the buffer.
Secure the bottle with cable tie to the buffer
2.
stand.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_23.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 247

4.

a1126fe.wmf
3.

1.

2.

a1126cea.wmf

3.

a1126gi.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_23.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 248

23.6 Brake adjustment

Finalise the machinery


Step Action Note
Park the car in suitable height to reach the
1. Use blocking device.
machinery top and brakes.

2. Install the rope guards.

a4544qe.tif

3. Re-adjust the top fixing.

Top fixing

Check that the gap between top fixing and


machine body is 5...10 mm.
4.
Open the clips and re-adjust the top fixing
position if necessary.

a4544qd.tif
Gap 5...10 mm
a4544qd.eps

Main construction of the brake

The machine is equipped with two direct acting


brakes of drum type.

The brakes operate independently and must


therefore be adjusted separately.

The brakes operates only after the machine has


stopped.

The brake torque is not adjustable.


a4821aa.eps

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_23.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 249

Check the stroke of the brake


Step Action Note

Centre nut
Open the brake fully by tightening the cen-
1.
tre nut in the bottom.

a4821ab.eps

0.05 mm
Measure the air gap between the brake lin- < 0.10 mm
ing and the drum by sliding a feel gauger
round the air gap.
2.
If the air gap is 0,05 mm but less than 0,10
mm go to Close the brake on page 251.
If the air gap is 0,10 mm or more go to
Adjust the stroke of the brake on page 250.

a4821ac.eps

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_23.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 250

Adjust the stroke of the brake


Step Action Note

Remove the locking plates of the adjust-


1.
ment screws.

a4821ad.eps

The air gap is to be adjusted from one end Adjusting screws


at a time by alternately turning the two at the upper end
adjusting screws.

NOTE: MX05 has only 3 adjusting screws.

The adjusting screws are very sensitive.


(1/4 turn corresponds to 0,25 mm change in
the air gap). Adjusting screws
a4821 ae.eps
at the lower end

0,10 mm

2. Set the air gap at the upper end to 0,10 mm.

a4821af.eps

0,05 mm
3. Set the air gap at the lower end to 0,05 mm.

a4821ag.eps

0,05 mm

4. Set the air gap at the upper end to 0,05 mm.

a4821ah.eps

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_23.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 251

Step Action Note

Secure the adjustment screws in position


with the lock plates.
5.
NOTE:
Do not alter the adjusting screw position,
place the lock plates to suit.

Close the brake


Step Action Note

Big washer
Adjust the centre nut so that the test screw
1. slightly touches the brake body while by
hand pressing the lever.

a4821ab.eps

Test screw

Centre nut

2. Check and test the brake release operation. a4821am.eps

Test screw

Washer

a4821an eps

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_23.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 252

Adjust the manual brake releasing device


Step Action Note

Lever

Adjust the brake levers parallel to the brake Set screw


1.
face using the set screw.

2. Tighten the test screw.

Test screw
Adjust the centre nut so that the test screw
3. slightly touches the brake body while by Centre nut
hand pressing the lever.

4. Screw out the test screw.


a4821am.eps

Test screw

Ensure that the big washer is not tight. It


5.
must be free to rotate.
Washer

Adjust the nut at the cable end so that the


levers at both sides lean against the set End nut
6.
screws and the bushings are sitting flush
inside the levers.
Bushing
Loosen the end nut 2...3 turns to slack the Set screw
7.
cable tension a little.

8. Tighten the counter nut.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_23.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 253

Check the operation of the manual brake control


Step Action Note
Check the brake function by pushing the
axle of the release handle.

1. Any further adjustments must be done


by the cable end nut, not by the centre
nut!

Ensure that the handle returns to the “brake


2. Push inwards to
closed” position by itself.
release the handle

Brake closed

If the handle does not return, check the


3. brake cable and the aluminium tube for
Brake starts open
sharp radii, twists etc..

Brake open
a4821ap.eps

Check after the brake is adjusted


Step Action Note
The brake air gap should be maximum
1.
0,1 mm.
The central nut washers must be movable
2. by hand and the gap between the washer
and the bottom must be min. 0,5 mm.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_23.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 254

23.7 Initial loading of the counterweight

Check before initial loading


Item Requirement Note
Correctly aligned and lubri-
Guide rails
cated.
Brake lever Adjusted. See page 248
Lift well Cleaned down.
Electrical wiring Completed.
Trunking lids Fitted.
All other tools and equipment Removed from car.
Two filler bits at mid floor
Filler weights level and remaining weights at For final balancing
lowest floor.
Counterweight On buffers.

Add enough filler weights to the counterweight frame to balance the empty car to the
counterweight
Step Action Note
Position the car so that the filler weights
1. can be installed in the counterweight frame
from the pit
Install the required number of filler weights The rest of the weights (50% of the nomi-
2.
in the frame to correspond the empty car. nal load) are used for the final balancing.
Open the brake. The car should slowly
3. move downwards due to the weight of the
installation hoist (appro. 60 kg).

a1126lg1.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_23.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 255

Balance the empty car and counterweight


The general rule of initial loading for empty car and counterweight balancing is to add the
delivered number of counterweight fillers minus the filler weights required to correspond the
50% of the contract load in to the counterweight.

This table shows the nominal number of weights. The real number of weights is depending on;
– Car decoration
– Through-type car or not
– Internal height of the car
– Door width
– Other equipment
Empty car weight/counterweight balancing
Contract
Machinery Car Minimum number of filler bits
load kg
Cast iron Iron
PW04 320 17 44
MX05 PW05 400 18 47
PW06 480 20 52
MX06 PW08 630 23 43
PW10 800 24 32
MX10 PW12 900 25 33
PW13 1000 26 35

Balancing for 50% contract load


Balancing for 50% of the nominal load
Contract
Machinery Car Number of filler bits
load kg
Cast iron Iron
PW04 320 6 16
MX05 PW05 400 7 19
PW06 480 9 23
MX06 PW08 630 13 24
PW10 800 16 21
MX10 PW12 900 18 24
PW13 1000 20 26

Weight per filler bit


Machine Cast iron Iron
MX05 26,8 10,3
MX06 25,1 13,4
MX10 25,2 18,9

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_23.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 256

Dismantle the hoist from the car


Step Action Note
Lower the car downwards by opening the
1. brake until there is space to get on the car
roof. Engage the brake again.
Disconnect the hoist hook from the car and
2.
connect it to the hoist body.
Drive the hoist up so that the tension
3. weight can be reached in the pit.
Dismantle the tension weight.
4. Role the rope up on the rope reeler.
Drive the hoist out on the landing and dis-
Due to weight of hoist 2 persons are
5. connect the diverter and power supply
required for this operation.
cable from the lift well.
Dismantle the safety pedal and safety pedal
6.
rope from the car.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_23.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 257

For your notes:

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_23.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 258

24 CAR FINALISING

Chapter Heading Page


24.1 Extra weights 258
24.2 Toe guard 260
24.3 Fan 260

24.1 Extra weights

Add extra weight to the bottom of the car platform


Step Action Note
Fix the other end plate of the extra weight
1. block with T-bolt to the front or rear side C
channel in the bottom of the car platform.
2. Fix a nut to the other end of the round bar.
Slide the threaded bar through the hole in
3.
the end plate.
4. Slide two weights onto the bar.

Stick the first T support plate to the C


5. channel and slide in place on the threaded
bar.
extrawe2.wmf

Add the rest of the needed weights and sup- If there is more than 5 pieces of weights,
6.
port plates. divide the pieces in two blocks.
Tie the block together and to the C channel If there is only one block, centralise the
7.
using the other end plate. location on the C-channel
If there are two blocks of weights, place
Install the other block on the other side of
8. them diagonally avoiding interference with
the platform if needed.
the travelling cable hanger.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_24.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 259

extrawei.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_24.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 260

24.2 Toe guard

Step Action Note


Set the sill top surface level with the fin-
1. Tighten the toe guard bracket bolts.
ished car floor surface.
2. Fix the toe guard using self-drilling screws.

24.3 Fan

Install the fan


Step Action Note
Route the fan cable to the car electrification
1.
unit.
2. Fix the fan to the box on top of the car.
Make sure the power is off!

Plug the fan into the connector in the car


3.
electrification unit.

The channel under the top beam covering is


used to route cables to the car electrifica-
tion box.
a6611cl.wmf

4. Fit the top beam cover in place.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_24.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 261

ADV2

ADV1

a1126hp.wmf

1. 2.

a6611dw.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_24.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 262

25 FINALISING

Chapter Heading Page


25.1 Health and safety at work 262
25.2 Control panel 262
25.3 Commissioning 266
25.4 Counterweight screen 274
25.5 Levelling accuracy setting 276
25.6 Motor balance measurement 276
25.7 Final steps 277
25.8 External options 278
25.9 Group connections 280

25.1 Health and safety at work

Mandatory Note
In case of conflict between the Code and the
Observe the requirements of your national Ele-
present commissioning instructions, rely on
vator Regulation Code.
your Code.
There are high voltages in the main circuit
Be extremely careful when working with the capacitors (>500 VDC) and on the inverter
electric components and their enclosures. board, in the safety chain and inside the con-
trol panel.
While the LED DANGER is ON on the inverter
After switching off the power, wait at least 5 board, there are high voltages in the drive mod-
minutes before taking any measurements ule.
inside the drive module in the motor connec-
tion box. elrisk.pcx

No personnel are permitted in the lift well during this phase.

25.2 Control panel

The control panel is pre-tested at the factory and the basic adjustments to the inverter module
are already set.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_25.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 263

Control panel introduction


Braking resistor: 306
Brake release lever
Inspection window
Drive unit: Full power button,
LWD potentiometers
Main contactors and
filter units
Main switch unit

LCECPU board (pos. 375)

LCE230 board (pos. 379)


F1 Safety chain 230 VAC

a512au.wmf
Fuses and LEDs
Fuse LED Nor-
Fuse Size/type LED
location Location mal
LCE230,
F1 Safety chain 230V 1A Safety input LCECPU, pos. 375 ON
379
2A/T Main switch Control volt-
F2 Control voltage Main switch unit ON
(5x20mm) unit age 230V
2A/T Main switch
F3 Door operators Door 230V Main switch unit ON
(5x20mm) unit
4A/T Main switch 24V Car&
F4 Car and shaft 24V LCECPU, pos. 375 ON
(5x20mm) unit shaft OK
4A/T Main switch Controller
F5 Controller 24V LCECPU, pos. 375 ON
(5x20mm) unit 24V
F6 & F7 Short circuit 6A/500V Main switch
protection (10x38mm) unit
F8 24V Car and shaft
4A/T Main switch Car and
(optional if > 10 LCECPU, pos. 375 ON
(5x20mm) unit shaft 24V
floors)

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_25.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 264

Main switch unit


Rescue drive buttons Elevator main switch (220) Main switch for the
lightings (262)

F2 2AT/230VAC
Control voltage

F4 4AT/
F3 2AT/230VAC 24VDC Car & shaft F8 4AT/24VDC
Door F5 4AT/24VDC Car & shaft
a512av.wmf Control voltage

Drive unit

CONTACTORS
201:1, 201:2, 204

LINE FILTER 389


MOTOR FILTERS

TPOL LED

OFFSET
FULL POWER
GAIN
lcedriv.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_25.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 265

LEDS IN THE USER INTERFACE

a512i.wmf

LED Function when LED is ON Normal Colour


status
EMERGENCY ALARM Emergency alarm push button pushed in car. OFF RED
LIFT IN FAULT Fault prevents the car driving. OFF RED
CPU RUNNING Indicates that CPU and SW are working. Blinking YELLOW
INSPECTION Inspection drive from car roof is on (42:DS). OFF YELLOW
RESCUE DRIVE Rescue drive from control panel is on (270). Input XM11/2 on OFF YELLOW
LCECPU pos. 375.
CAR COMMUNICATION OK Car communication network is working. ON GREEN
SHAFT COMM. OK Shaft communication network is working. ON GREEN
+24V CONTROLLER OK + 24 V DC Control voltage is OK. ON GREEN
+5V CONTROLLER OK + 5 V DC Control voltage is OK. ON GREEN
+24V CAR & SHAFT OK + 24 V DC Car and shaft voltage is OK. ON GREEN
CHANGE BOARD Fatal failure on the LCECPU board. OFF RED
SPEED > 0,1m/s The LED is ON when the speed goes over 0,1 m/s while acceler- ON/OFF YELLOW
ating and goes OFF when the speed goes under 0,3 m/s while
decelerating.
START PERMIT One of the main contactors (201:1, 201:2) or the dynamic brake ON/OFF YELLOW
contactor (204) has not been released. Input XD1/3 on board
379.
MAIN CONTACTOR LCECPU has given main contactor activation command. ON/OFF YELLOW
SHAFT DOOR CONTACT Shaft doors are closed. Input XH2/3 on board pos. 379 has volt- ON/OFF YELLOW
age.
CAR DOOR CONTACT Car doors are closed. Input XC1/7 on board pos. 379 has volt- ON/OFF YELLOW
age.
CLOSE DOOR COMMAND Close the door command is given. ON/OFF YELLOW
DRIVE NEED Controller has recognised a need for drive. ON/OFF YELLOW
V3F OK V3F has no faults. It is able to drive. ON GREEN
SAFETY INPUT Safety chain input XC1/5 on board pos. 379 has voltage. ON GREEN
OPEN DOOR COMMAND Open door command is given. ON/OFF YELLOW
PHOTOCELL Photocell is active. Inputs XB29/2 and XB31/2 on board ON/OFF YELLOW
LCECCB pos. 806.
OPEN BUTTON Door open button is active. Input XC10/1 on board LCECOB ON/OFF YELLOW
pos. 32.
CLOSE FORCE LIMITER Door closing force limiter is active. Inputs XB28/8 and XB30/8 OFF YELLOW
on board LCECCB pos. 806.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_25.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 266

LED Function when LED is ON Normal Colour


status
DRIVE UP Drive up command is given to V3F. ON/OFF YELLOW
77:U Car is at top floor deceleration area. ON/OFF YELLOW
61:U Car is at about +10mm ... -140mm from floor level. ON/OFF YELLOW
30 Car is at door zone of front door. ON/OFF YELLOW
B30 Car is at rear door zone. ON/OFF YELLOW
61:N Car is at about -10mm ... +140mm from floor level. ON/OFF YELLOW
77:N Car is at bottom floor deceleration area. ON/OFF YELLOW
77:S Car is at terminal floor area. ON/OFF YELLOW
DRIVE DOWN Drive down command is given V3F. ON/OFF YELLOW
INHIBIT DOOR OPENING Door opening is inhibited with the switch beside this LED. OFF YELLOW
INHIBIT LANDING CALLS Landing calls are inhibited with the switch beside this LED. OFF YELLOW

Refer to the APPENDIX 4. User Interface manual for the User Interface operation instructions.

25.3 Commissioning

Check list
Before starting the commissioning, check that the following basic things have been done:
– Lift well installation.
– Machinery installation.
– Car installation.
– Car and landing doors.
– Ropes installed.
– Car and shaft electrification including the signalling devices.
– The positioning magnets are installed accurately according to the shaft diagram.
– The installation hoist is removed from the car and left suspended in 2:1 mode at top of the
lift well.
– Car and counterweight are balanced.

The elevator first drive


The first run must always be made from the control panel with the car positioned so that
there is access to the car roof from the control panel level. NO PEOPLE ARE ALLOWED
TO BE ON CAR ROOF. The hoist must be removed from the car, the parking plate
should be in position and the parking bolt must be retracted.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_25.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 267

Setting the elevator to drive for the first time


Refer to Appendix 5. for the parameter list.
NOTE: These settings must be made before the first drive.
Step Action Note
RDF overconnects final limit
Turn the elevator to RDF (switch 270 on control switch (51), safety gear switch
1.
panel). (52) and overspeed governor
(127).
Turn the Inspection Drive mode on the car roof to
2.
NORMAL.
3. Fit the overspeed governor rope in the large groove. Wear gloves.
4. Turn power ON from the main switch (220).
Refer to the Fuses and LEDs on
5. Check that FUSE LEDs turn on.
page 263.
Check the motor type parameter.
Action Display
Push MENU button until number 2
2 __ _ __
shows on the MENU display.
Push SELECT/ACCEPT button. 2 _ 1 _ __
6. Push SELECT/ACCEPT button; XX = motor type
if the motor type is not correct, set 2 _ 1 _XX, 05 = MX05
the correct one using the arrow but- where XX is flashing 06 = MX06
tons. 10 = MX10
Push SELECT/ACCEPT button
2 _ 1_XX, steady
to confirm the correct setting.

Switch the power OFF and ON to reset the control New settings are recorded at
7.
system. resetting.
Push RUN button in the RDF unit (270:RB) and Refer to the LEDS IN THE
8. check SAFETY INPUT LED. USER INTERFACE on page
DO NOT PUSH DIRECTION BUTTONS! 265.
Check the safety chain operation with RDF:
-Activate, one at a time, the emergency stop push button on the car, stop button and ten-
9.
sion weight contact in the lift well pit, and, after each activation, push the RDF/RUN but-
ton and check that the SAFETY INPUT LED does not light.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_25.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 268

Temporary adjustment of the load weighing device


NOTE: You must not attempt to drive the elevator before this adjustment is done.
Step Action Note
Turn the GAIN potentiometer first to one end. Then turn it all the way to the other end
1.
counting the number of turns. Reset the potentiometer in the middle position.
This is not the final adjustment.
Turn the OFFSET potentiometer so that the load
This is used only to drive the ele-
indication in the User Interface shows 50%.
vator for the first time.
Action Display
Push MENU button until number 5
5 _ _ __
2. shows on the MENU display.
Push ACCEPT button. 5 _1 __
Push ACCEPT button. L _ _ xx where xx is load%
Turn the OFFSET potentiometer
on drive module until number 50 L _ _ 50
shows on the screen.

Test while driving the elevator for the first time


Step Action
Check tachometer polarity and motor rotation direction with RDF.
Try to drive the car downwards and check the operation of the TPOL LED and car move-
ment.
Press TPOL Running Tacho Motor
DOWN ON DOWN OK OK
DOWN ON UP WRONG WRONG
1.
DOWN blinking NOT OK WRONG
DOWN blinking NOT WRONG OK elrisk.pcx
If the car is moving in the wrong direction, switch the power off and swap two phases
in the motor supply cable and swap the wires of the tacho cable. Repeat the check.
If the TPOL LED is blinking and the car is not moving, swap the motor phases and
repeat the test. If necessary repeat the swapping in A above.
Switch the Inspection drive unit on the car roof to SERVICE and the RDF in the control-
2.
ler OFF. Check the operation of the inspection drive unit buttons.
Check the limit switch (pos. 51) on car roof by turning the elevator in SERVICE mode.
Activate one-by-one the car roof stop button, machinery stop button (if applicable) and
overspeed governor contact. Start to run, the elevator should not run.
Drive downwards and activate the final limit switch. The elevator should stop immedi-
ately.
3. Keep the landing door lock open and try to start to drive. The elevator should not run.
Repeat this with all landing doors.
Test the car door lock operation by opening the car door with the test buttons in the car
door operator (possible in the SERVICE drive). Leave them open and turn to NORMAL
drive. Check the LEDs in the User Interface. CAR DOOR CONTACT and SAFETY
INPUT LEDs should not light.
4. Test that the car (87) and landing door contacts (121) break the safety chain.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_25.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 269

The buttons and display in the User Interface


MENU display SUBMENU VALUE display SELECT/ACCEPT
display - button

MENU
- button

a512i.wmf

MOTOR SUPPLY
Can alternatively be on the top of the controller
(if BDT option is delivered)
CONTACTORS
201:1, 201:2, 204

LINE FILTER 389


MOTOR FILTERS

TPOL LED

OFFSET
FULL POWER
GAIN
lcedriv.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_25.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 270

Balance the car and the counterweight


If final car interior is added later:
Add an equivalent weight in the car for balancing purposes.
After the car interior has been installed, take the unnecessary weights from the car and re-adjust
the offset and gain settings on the load weighing device.

Check the balancing of the empty car and the counterweight


Step Action Note
Drive car and counterweight to the same
1.
height in the lift well.
Open the brake and check through the win-
Should not move if car and counterweight
2. dow in the controller if the overspeed gov-
are at same level.
ernor ropes move.
3. Drive the car a little upwards with RDF.
Loosen the brake for a while and watch
4. through the window in the controller if the Should not move.
ropes move.
5. Do the same in the other direction.
6. Add or remove fillers if necessary.
Repeat until you are sure that the empty car
7.
and counterweight are balanced.
After balancing, check that at the rope
The rope clips must not rub each other or
8. anchorages the max. difference in the
the ropes.
spring lengths is 3 mm.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_25.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 271

2.
1.

a512gm.wmf

3.

a512gn.wmf
a1126ma.wmf

4.
Counterweight

a512gm.wmf

5.

a512go.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_25.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 272

Add fillers to the counterweight to correspond to 50% of nominal load


Step Action Note
1. Drive the counterweight close to the buffer.

Add fillers equivalent to 50% of nominal load to the


counterweight.
Refer to the Balancing for 50% contract load on page
2. 273.
In case of heavy decoration, check that the number of
delivered filler bits is corresponding the weight of
the finalised car.

a1126lg2.wmf
3. Fix the filler bits to the counterweight frame.

Adjust the load weighing device OFFSET setting to It is impossible to drive the eleva-
0%. tor before this adjustment is done.
Action Display
Push MENU button until number 5 5 _ _ __
shows on the MENU display.
4.
Push ACCEPT button. 5 _1 _ __
Push ACCEPT button. L _ _ xx where xx is load %
Turn the OFFSET potentiometer L__0
on drive module until number 0
shows on the screen.

GAIN setting of the load weighing device


Step Action Note
Bring the car to a suitable height at the top of the lift
1.
well and lock it with blocking device.
Loosen the brake and wait until the load display is
2. steady. Close the brake and open again for a while to
make sure that all the tension is released.
Set the GAIN of the load weighing device with the
User Interface in the controller.
Action Display
Push MENU button until number 5
5 _ _ __
shows on the MENU display.
3.
Push ACCEPT button. 5 _1 _ _
Push ACCEPT button. L _ _ xx where xx is load%
Turn the GAIN potentiometer on
drive module until number 50 L_ _ 50
shows on the screen.

4. Check the setting by loosening the brake again.


5. Close the brake.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_25.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 273

Balancing for 50% contract load


Balancing for 50% of the nominal load
Contract
Machinery Car Number of filler bits
load kg
Cast iron Iron
PW04 320 6 16
MX05 PW05 400 7 19
PW06 480 9 23
MX06 PW08 630 13 24
PW10 800 16 21
MX10 PW12 900 18 24
PW13 1000 20 26

MENU display SUBMENU VALUE display SELECT/ACCEPT


display - button

MENU
- button

a512i.wmf

OFFSET

FULL POWER

GAIN

lcedriv.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_25.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 274

25.4 Counterweight screen

Fit the counterweight screen to the guide rails


Step Action Note
Fix the counterweight screen in position
1.
onto the counterweight frame.
2. Tighten the fixing bolts.

25.4.1 Setup

Set the elevator to Setup mode


Step Action Note
So that LEDs 61:U,
1. Drive the car using RDF to the lowest floor. 77:N, (77:S), 30
and B30 are lit.
Use User Interface to start the setup.
Action Display
Push MENU button until number 5 5 __ __
shows on the MENU display.
Push ACCEPT button. Number 1 shows 5 _1 __
on the SUBMENU display.
2. Push ^ - button until number 2 shows on 5 _2__
the SUBMENU display.
Push ACCEPT button once. A blinking 5. _2. _0., where 0 is
number 0 shows on the VALUE display. blinking
Select UP ARROW button until 1 5. _2. _1., where 1 is
shows on the display instead of 0. blinking
Push ACCEPT button to confirm the 5. _2. _1., where all
selection. the numbers are steady

Turn the RDF switch (270) OFF and car will commence the setup
3.
drive.
4. You can follow the setup drive in the display.

Setup using the User Interface


Step Display Stage
= . _ _ . _ _ ., where SUBMENU display
1. SETUP drive going on.
tells the floor number where the car is.
= . NN. _ _ ., the number of the topmost
2. Car has arrived back to the topmost floor.
floor in the SUBMENU display.
3. . .. .. Setup OK.
4. Wait a second.
5. Floor number on display. You can proceed.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_25.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 275

1.
300mm

a1126iua.wmf

Correction of parameter settings


IMPORTANT: Before driving on the car roof, change parameter 71
Step Action Note
Check the setting of the parameter 71. IT MUST BE 0. OTHER-
WISE THE CAR DRIVES TOO HIGH ON INSPECTION
DRIVE.
Action Display
Push MENU button until number 1 1 __ __
shows on the MENU display.
Push ACCEPT button. Number 1 shows 1 _1 __
on the SUBMENU display.
1. If the value of
Push ^ - button until number 2 shows on 1 _71_
parameter 71 is
the SUBMENU display.
something else
Push ACCEPT button once. A blinking 1 _71 _0., where 0 is than 0, change
number 0 shows on the VALUE display. blinking it to 0.
To change the value select DOWN
1 _71 _0., where 1 is
ARROW button until 0 shows on the
blinking
display instead of earlier one.
Push ACCEPT button to confirm the 1 _71 _0., where all
selection. the numbers are steady

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_25.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 276

25.5 Levelling accuracy setting

Set the normal stopping point


Check that the distance between the 61:U and 61:N switches is 130 mm.
This setting defines the normal stopping point.

Check stopping point at each level


Step Action
Drive in the car to each floor and measure the differences of the heights between stopping
1.
points.
2. Go back to the topmost floor and go to the car roof.
Drive on the car roof to the magnets of each floor that need adjusting and adjust the mag-
3.
nets to correct the levelling.
4. Perform SETUP drive if re-adjustment was made.
5. Recheck the levelling accuracy by driving to each floor again on normal drive.
6. Repeat points 2-5 if needed.

25.6 Motor balance measurement

Step Action Note


Drive board:
Motor current
measurement
Connect the voltage meter to the measuring
point “Motor current measurement” on the
drive board.
1.
This voltage is equivalent to the motor cur- GND
rent (0,1 VAC = 1 A).

Record the values.


lcedriv.wmf
2. Drive the car empty downwards and record the measured value.
3. Drive the car with 100% load upwards and record the measured value.
Compare the values to the table on the right.
4.
If the values are much higher, contact an expert.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_25.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 277

25.7 Final steps

Step Action
Connect the emergency lighting battery plug “227 Battery” in the car roof electrification
unit.
1.
Do not connect the battery before commissioning is complete (to prevent unnecessary
discharging).
2. Make the settings for the KONEXION according to AM-13.90.1.
Check the Emergency battery drive if any by switching the power off, when the elevator
3. drives in normal drive. The elevator should drive to the defined floor level and open
doors.

Motor current recommendation


Driving with empty car down and 100% load up
Nominal load /kg
Minimum current /A Maximum current /A
320 6,4 8,0
360 6,8 8,5
400 7,2 9,1
440 7,6 9,6
480 8,1 10,2
520 8,5 10,7
560 9,0 11,3
600 9,4 11,8
640 9,9 12,4
680 10,4 13,0
720 10,8 13,6
760 11,3 14,2
800 11,8 14,8
840 12,3 15,4
880 12,8 16,1
920 13,3 16,7
960 13,8 17,4
1000 14,4 18,1

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_25.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 278

25.8 External options

External inputs connected to the LCEOPT board


Inputs Connector Note
FID fire detection
Disconnect the jumper from
External FRD firemens’ drive Connector X5.
the pin before connecting the
External OSS out of service Refer to the pins in the circuit
cable.
switch diagrams.
Only for potential free.
EPD emergency power drive

External outputs connected to the LCEOPT board


Connector
Inputs Refer the pins in the Note
circuit diagrams.
FRD firemens’ drive return
X1
FRD firemens’ drive service
EPD emergency power drive mode X2
EPD emergency power drive running X3
EPD emergency power drive returned X3
OSS out of service indication X4
DAL-GP disturbance alarm X5

Connections of the remote alarm


Step Action Note
Connect the remote alarm output cable to
1. the connector XM30 on the LCERAL Refer to the circuit diagrams.
board.
Set the required alarm transfer delay using
2.
potentiometer S2 on the LCERAL board.
Check the required alarm method.
If required, inhibit the remote alarm by set-
3.
ting the Alarm switch in OFF position.
4. Test and reset the remote alarms.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_25.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 279

4. 5.
1.
2. X1
3. 6. LCECAN

X2

X3 LCEOPT
LCERAL
LCEGTW
1. X4
. Intercom
.
X5
.
10. a512ie.wmf
a512id.tif

Alarm output

lceral.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_25.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 280

25.9 Group connections

Duplex elevators
Step Action
1. Take the power OFF in all the controllers.
2. Refer to the circuit diagrams and layout drawings for the correct order of the controllers.
Connect the group cable in the first controller on the LCEGTW board to the connector
3.
XG1B. Connect the end resistor to the connector XG1A. Refer to the circuit diagrams.
Connect the group cable in the second controller on the LCEGTW board to the connector
4.
XG1A. Connect the end resistor to the connector XG1B. Refer to the circuit diagrams.
In special deliveries also a duplex group might need the end resistors in the LCECAN
5.
board connectors. Refer to the circuit diagrams.
6. Connect the power ON in both controllers.
7. Check that GROUP 24 V OK LEDs are lit.

Triplex elevators
Step Action Note
1. Take the power OFF in all the controllers.
2. Refer to the circuit diagrams and layout drawings for the correct order of the controllers.
Connect in the first controller the first group cable on the LCEGTW board to the connec-
3. tor XG1B.
Connect the second group cable on the LCECAN board to the connector XG3B.
Connect in the second controller the first group cable on the LCEGTW board to the con-
4. nector XG1A.
Connect the second group cable on the LCECAN board to the connector XG3A.
Connect in the second controller the first group cable on the LCEGTW board to the con-
5. nector XG1B.
Connect the second group cable on the LCECAN board to the connector XG3B.
Connect in the third controller the first group cable on the LCEGTW board to the connec-
6. tor XG1A.
Connect the second group cable on the LCECAN board to the connector XG3A.
Check that the connectors XG1A and XG3A in the first controller and XG1B and XG3B
7.
in the third controller are equipped with end resistors. Refer to the circuit diagrams.
8. Connect the power ON in all the controllers.
9. Check that GROUP 24 V OK LEDs are lit.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_25.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 281

1. Controller 2. Controller

LCEGTW LCEGTW

a512ii.wmf

lcegtw.wmf

1. Controller 2. Controller 3. Controller

LCECAN LCECAN LCECAN

LCEGTW LCEGTW LCEGTW

a512ij.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_25.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 282

26 COMMISSIONING OF THE CAR DOOR

As this door is pre-adjusted at the factory, there should not be any reason for on- site adjust-
ments.

Start
Step Action Note
Turn the elevator to INSPECTION drive
1.
mode.
If the door is not in the fully closed or open
2. Switch the power on. position, it will close slowly after the
power supply is switched on.
3. Push the OPEN button at the door operator. The door should open slowly.
4. Push the CLOSE button. The door should close.

Adjust the closing force


Step Action Note
Open and close the door by hand and check
1.
that there is no mechanical obstruction.
Close the door using CLOSE button (or Test buttons operate only when the elevator
2.
close command). is in inspection mode.
Do not attempt to measure the closing force
of a moving door. Stop it first.
Stop the moving door manually and meas- To get real closing force, you have to add
ure the closing force by measuring the the weight of the closing weight (15 N).
3.
motor voltage (plug X4) For centre opening doors, the measurement
or using the closing force gauge. shows half of the closing force. For side
opening doors the measurement shows the
total closing force.
Adjust the closing force by turning the The closing force will increase by turning
4.
close force potentiometer P1. the potentiometer clockwise.

Adjust the door speed


Step Action Note
Adjust the door speed with the DIP
1. There are 4 possible speed ranges.
switches S1/1 and S1/2.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_26.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 283

CLOSE button OPEN button

X4
P1

3.

Closing force 100 N 110 N 120 N 130 N 140 N 150 N


X4 / ADV2 8,2 V 9,2 V 10,2 V 11,2 V 12,2 V 13,2 V

Closing force 120 N 130 N 140 N 150 N 160 N


X4 / ADV1 8,2 V 8,85 V 9,35 V 10,2 V 10,8 V

3.

a1129ai.wmf

S1 ON OFF
1 SPEED 4 SPEED 1 2 3 4
SPEED 1
2
OFF ON OFF ON
OFF OFF ON ON
3
REOPEN IN ON
4 OPEN BUTTON ON

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_26.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 284

LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes)


LED Name LED illuminated when
H1 CLOSE Close command is on.
H2 OPEN Open command is on.
H3 OPEN END Door is at open end position.
H4 CFL REOPEN Reopen request from ADV.
H5 OPEN BUTTON Open button is pressed.
H6 SERVICE DRIVE Elevator is in the inspection drive mode.

H80 POWER Power of the ADV board is on.


Short-circuit in the door motor or power
H40 PWR-ST SH DWN
unit. Motor temperature is too high.
H20 WATCH DOG Fault in the microprocessor.

26.1 Troubleshooting

Step Action Note


The power is ON, LED H80 lights if LINE
IN is connected and the fuse or circuit
breaker in the controller is on.
Motor wires are connected: X4 (black and
1. The door does not move at all. white wires).
Controller gives open and close commands
(X1/16 - 17, LED H2 and H1).
Supervision LED H20 and H40.
Motor temperature, if LED is always on.
Controller gives open command (LED H2).
Controller does not give close command
2. The door does not open.
(LED H1).
Landing door lock is not jammed.
Controller gives close command (LED
H1).
3. The door does not close. The closing force is high enough. Turn the
ABS.FORCE potentiometer slightly clock-
wise to increase the force.
The commands from the controller are long
enough (LED H1 and H2).
4. The door does not fully open or close.
LEDs H20 and H40; if they are flashing,
check the connection of the plug X4.
Controller does not give the REOPEN
5. The door does not reopen. REQUEST signal (LED H4).
The close command is still on (LED H1).

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_26.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 285

S1 ON OFF
1 SPEED SELECTION
2
Reopen IN “30” Reopen IN “30”
3 connected to gnd potential free
Open button brake Open button
4 contacted to +24V contacted to GND

ADV 1 ADV 1
a1129at.wmf ADV 2R ADV 2L ADV 2R ADV 2L
BLACK WHITE WHITE BLACK

26.2 Commissioning of the curtain of light

Check that the red LED in the receiver in about 1700mm height is lit when the beam is
obstructed or measure the signal line change from GND to 24V. On the heavy duty operator
beam obstruction is indicated by a green LED on the P:C: input (number 44).
If the LED is off, but the doors do not close:
1 Check cables and supply.
2 Check that the signal output is not disconnected from the door operator or controller.
3 The door operator or controller is not responding the signals. Check this by connecting the
signal input to GND, the doors should close. If it does not, the problem lies within the con-
trol system.
If the LED is on but the door will not close there are three most likely causes.
1 The 24V supply is not present on the (TX) unit.
2 The units are obstructed or very dirty.
3 The distance between the units is greater than the maximum specified.
If none of the previous possibilities resolve the problem, substitution of both units is necessary.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_26.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 286

27 SAFETY INSPECTION

Chapter Heading Page


27.1 Standards and rules 286
27.2 Prerequisites 286
27.3 Safety 286
27.4 Safety tests 288

27.1 Standards and rules

This safety inspection procedure is in accordance with the EN 81 and KONE Corporation
safety policies.

Possible differences between this instruction and local safety regulations must be considered.
Because of the totally new elevator concept in the MonoSpace elevator, the use of local meth-
ods must be carefully designed in cooperation with the product designers in order to avoid any
safety hazards or damage to the product.

Compare this instruction to the delivery documents to find possible variations, for example in
the circuit diagrams.

27.2 Prerequisites

Before starting the safety inspection tests, make sure that:


– Installation and adjustments are completed.
– Commissioning with the safety chain checks is completed.
– Buffer heights are correctly aligned.
– Safety spaces above and under car are correct.
– Travelling cable is long enough to drive onto the buffers.
– There are no unnecessary objects in the lift well or on the car roof.

27.3 Safety

Because of the totally new elevator concept, all the works must be carefully planned in order to
avoid any safety hazards or damage to the product.

CHECK THAT THERE IS NO-ONE INSIDE THE CAR OR IN THE LIFT WELL.

DISCONNECT THE LANDING CALLS USING THE USER INTERFACE DURING


THE SAFETY INSPECTION TIME, SO THAT THE INSPECTION WILL NOT BE
INTERRUPTED AND TO AVOID TRAPPING PASSENGERS IN THE LIFT.

BEFORE GOING TO THE CAR ROOF, PUSH THE CAR ROOF STOP BUTTON
DOWN AND TURN THE INSPECTION DRIVE UNIT TO INSPECTION DRIVE
BEFORE RELEASING THE STOP BUTTON.

Note: After the labels of each block there is a short reference to the EN 81-1:1998 Annex D.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_27.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 287

Braking resistor: 306

Brake release lever

Inspection window

Drive unit: Full power button,


LWD potentiometer,

Main contactors and


filter units
Main switch unit

LCECPU board (pos. 375)

LCE230 board (pos. 379)


F1 Safety chain 230 VAC

a512au.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_27.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 288

27.4 Safety tests

Visual check (Annex D1.c and d, Annex D2.a, b and c)


Step Check Note
Landing doors must be locked while the car
is not at the level.
1. Locking.
Controller door, main switch and lighting
switch must be lockable.
Check that the safety devices, suspension
2. Verification of components. elements and their attachments are those
indicated in the elevator register.
Controlling devices:
RDF buttons in the controller and the
Turn the RDF in the controller ON and
3. inspection unit on the car roof MUST NOT
Inspection drive unit on the car roof to
control the elevator simultaneously.
Inspection and try to drive with the RDF.
Turn Inspection drive unit on Normal and
RDF ON and push both RUN and one of
The elevator MUST NOT run unless the
the direction buttons in the RDF. The car
4. RUN button and one of the direction but-
should move in the correct direction.
tons are pressed simultaneously.
Remove finger from the RUN button, the
elevator should stop.
RDF will bypass the following safety
Safety chain check during RDF drive. devices:
Check the safety chain switches that are not -Safety gear switch
5.
by passed by RDF are able to prevent driv- -Final limit switches
ing. -Overspeed governor switch
-Buffer contact (if any)

Start permit
Step Check Note
1. Switch the power OFF.
2. Bridge the pins XD1/1 and XD1/3 together.
3. Switch the power ON.
4. Try to drive. Elevator should not run.
5. Switch the power OFF.
6. Remove the bridge.
7. Take the plug XD1 off.
The resistance is normally 0 ohms, but it
Measure resistance between XD1/1 and
8. should increase to infinity when pushing
XD1/3. Push 201:1 and 201:2 down.
either 201:1 or 201:2.
9. Reconnect the plug XD1.
10. Switch the power ON.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_27.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 289

Measurements (Annex D2.e and h3)


Step Check Note
Balance measurement:
Drive board:!
Measure the voltage of the measuring point
“Motor current measurement” on the drive Motor current
board. measurement

This voltage is equivalent to the motor cur-


rent (0,1 VAC = 1 A).
1. GND
Drive the car empty downwards and with
100 % load upwards.
Record the values.

The difference of the measurements may


be about 0,5 A. lcedriv.wmf
Speed measurement:
Measure the inspection drive speed using manual tachometer.
Measure the tachometer voltage during the inspection drive.
Measure the tachometer voltage during normal drive
2. Calculate the nominal speed using formula below:

Nominal speed =
Tacho voltage at normal speed X inspection drive speed
Tacho voltage at inspection drive

Overspeed governor test (Annex D2.i and n)


Step Action Note
1. Drive the car using RDF drive to suitable height to engage the blocking device.
2. Push the car roof stop button down and go to the car roof.
3. Engage the blocking device.
4. Lift the rope out of the groove.
Measure the overspeed governor speed
using a manual tachometer. Accelerate the
Read the correct operation speed from the
5. overspeed governor manually until the
overspeed governor type label.
electrical contact (pos. 22) operates. Read
the operation speed.
Correct tripping area:
Measure the overspeed governor speed Tripping range
using a manual tachometer. Accelerate the Nominal
Vnx1,25 +
6. overspeed governor manually until it trips. speed Vnx1,15
(0,25/Vn)
Rotate the overspeed governor to the trip-
ping direction. Read the tripping speed. 0,6 m/s > 0,7 m/s <1,5 m/s
1,0 m/s > 1,15 m/s <1,5 m/s
7. Place the rope back into groove after testing.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_27.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 290

One-sided braking test with rated load (optional test)


Step Action Note
1. Engage the blocking device.
2. Tighten the brake centre nut.
If the brake is correctly adjusted there will
3. Check for car movement.
be no movement.
4. Loosen the nut to have washer movable with a clearance of 0,5 mm.
5. Repeat steps 2...4 to the other brake side.
6. Disengage the blocking device.

Car safety gear test (Annex D2.j)


Prevent the access from landings to the car for this testing. Reserve the car lifting tool for this
test.
Step Action Note
Move the plug of the XM12 connector Test position is between the pins XM12/3
1. from centre position to test position to and XM12/4.
make the overspeed governor test.
Call the car to the topmost floor using land-
2. Turn the Inhibit landing doors for a while.
ing calls.
3. When the door opens, turn RDF ON.
4. Load 90 ... 100 % of the nominal load into the car.
5. Turn the RDF OFF. The doors close and elevator starts to level.
Call the car back to the topmost floor using landing calls.
6.
When doors are opened, turn the RDF ON.
7. Load the rest of the load to reach 125 % of nominal load.
The doors do not close and the overload
8. Turn the RDF OFF.
sound is activated.
Push the FULL POWER button until the
9. The overload sound turns off.
doors are closed.
THERE MUST BE NO-ONE ON THE
Give a car call downwards using the User CAR ROOF OR IN THE LIFT WELL!
10.
Interface. Check that there is enough space down-
wards.
Observe the door zone LEDs and push the
overspeed governor test button immedi-
11. The elevator should stop immediately.
ately when the door zone appears, so the
car is stopping at door zone.
Try to drive down with the RDF drive to The elevator should not drive, when the
12.
check that the safety gear is engaged. safety gear is engaged.
13. Take half of the load away.
Push the FULL POWER button and drive
14. the car upwards with the RDF. Check that Use the car lifting tool if necessary.
the safety chain remains broken.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_27.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 291

Step Action Note


Reset the overspeed governor by moving Reset position is between the pins
the plug XM12 to the reset position and XM12/1 and XM12/2.
15.
pushing the overspeed governor test but- The safety chain should be complete after
ton. this reset.
Release the safety gear contact under the
16. car by pulling the overspeed governor rope Turn the Inhibit landing doors ON again.
on the tension weight side upwards.
17. Reset the jumper to the centre position. XM12/2 and XM12/3.
18. Check that the safety gear marks are level and equal on both sides.
19. Remove the safety gear marks with a file.

Traction test with empty car (Annex D2.h)


Step Action Note
1. Drive the counterweight to the buffers using RDF.
2. Open the brake to ensure the counterweight is resting on the buffers.
Drive the car upwards and press FULL
POWER button on the drive control board.
3. The car should not move.
Look through the window at the car move-
ment.
4. Drive the car back down to the floor level.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_27.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 292

Combined traction test and braking test with 125 % load (Annex D.d and h)
Step Action Note

Switch RDF ON. Drive the car to a suitable


height to get to the car roof.
Push the car roof stop button down and go
1.
to the car roof.
Mark the ropes and the sheave for the trac-
tion test.

a1126fi.wmf

2. Release the stop button and turn the RDF OFF.


Call the car to the topmost floor using land-
3. Turn the Inhibit landing doors for a while.
ing calls.
4. When the door opens, turn RDF ON.
5. Load 90 ... 100 % of the nominal load into the car.
6. Turn the RDF OFF. The doors close and elevator starts to level.
Call the car back to the topmost floor using landing calls.
7.
When doors are opened, turn the RDF ON.
8. Load the rest of the load to reach 125 % of nominal load.
The doors do not close and the overload
9. Turn the RDF OFF.
sound is activated.
Push the FULL POWER button until the
10. The overload sound turns off.
doors are closed.
11. Turn the RDF OFF.
12. Give a car call down with the User Interface.
When the elevator has reached the normal
speed, observe the door zone LEDs and
13. turn RDF ON immediately when the door The elevator should stop immediately.
zone appears, so the car is stopping at door
zone.
After the lift stops, drive the car down to
14. Use car lifting tool if necessary.
the next floor level.
15. Remove overweight from the car and drive the car back to the top floor using RDF.
Check the markings on the ropes and
16.
sheave. Measure the sliding of ropes.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_27.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 293

Limit switch check (Annex D2.g)


Step Action Note
1. Drive the car using RDF onto the lower final limit ramp.
Switch to normal and check the safety The safety chain must be broken, when the
2.
chain. final limit switch has operated.
3. Drive the car using RDF above the lower final limit ramp.
4. Switch to normal and call the car to the topmost floor.
5. Drive the car using RDF onto the upper final limit ramp.
Switch to normal and check the safety The safety chain must be broken, when the
6.
chain. final limit switch has operated.
7. Bring the car back to the topmost floor using the RDF drive.

Check the DTS function in the parametre list.


The function is tested at the factory.
Drive time supervision test
Step Action Note
Drive the car below 77:U.
1.
Switch the power OFF.
Remove the plugs of 61:N, 61:U, 30 and 30B (if any) from the car top electrification unit.
2.
Turn the power ON.
This is the correction drive delay.
The real DTS time can be read using User
Turn the RDF OFF.
Interface in the software versions 2.3 or
The elevator starts correction drive down-
3. younger (deliveries beginning 1st July
wards and should stop after max. 45 sec-
1998).
onds.
No one is allowed to be on the car roof or
in the lift well.
4. Reset the elevator by switching the main supply off and on again.
5. Bring the car back using RDF drive.
6. Reconnect the removed plugs 61:N, 61:U, 30 and 30B (if any).

Thermistor test
Step Action Note
1. Disconnect the thermistor plug XT.
2. Try to drive the elevator. It should not drive.
3. Check the fault code using User Interface.
4. Reconnect the plug XT.
5. Reset the fault.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_27.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 294

Check the car and counterweight balancing


Step Action Note
Load 50 % of the nominal load into the The counterweight is balanced to empty car
1. car. weight + 50 % of the nominal load.
2. Drive car and counterweight to the same height in the lift well.
Open the brake and check through the Should not move if car and counterweight
3. window in the controller to see if the are at same level.
overspeed governor ropes move.
4. Drive the car a little upwards with RDF.
Loosen the brake for a while and watch
5. through the window in the controller to Should not move.
see if the ropes move.
6. Do the same in the other direction.
If the car and counterweight are not bal-
Drive the car back to level with RDF and
7. anced, add or take off filler weights from the
unload the extra weight from the car. counterweight and recheck the balancing.

Readjust the load weighing device setting


Step Action Note
Keep the doors
1. Drive the empty car to the topmost floor level.
closed.
The weight of the
Turn the OFFSET potentiometer so that the load indication in the
empty car is indi-
User Interface shows 0 %.
cated.
Action Display
Push MENU button until number 5 shows
5 __ __
2. on the MENU display
Push ACCEPT button 5 _1 __
Push ACCEPT button L __ xx where xx is load %
Turn the OFFSET potentiometer on the
drive module until number 0 shows on the L __ 00
screen
3. Drive the car down a little and engage the blocking device pin into the blocking plate.
Open the brake and turn the GAIN potentiometer so that the load indication in the User
Interface shows 50 %.
Action Display
Push MENU button until number 5 shows
5 __ __
4. on the MENU display
Push ACCEPT button 5 _1 __
Push ACCEPT button L __ xx where xx is load %
Turn the GAIN potentiometer on the drive
L __ 50
module until number 50 shows on the screen
5. Close the brake.
6. Release the blocking device.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_27.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 295

Measure main voltage insulation resistance (Annex D2.f)


Step Action Note
Switch the main switches 220 and 262
1. The maximum measuring voltage is 500 V.
OFF.
Measure the insulation resistance between the earth bar and secondary side of the phase
2.
terminals in the main switch (220).
Measure the insulation resistance between the earth bar and secondary side of the phase
3.
(L) and neutral terminal (N) in the lighting switch (262).

Measure safety chain insulation resistance (Annex D2.f)


Step Action Note
Disconnect the connectors XM5 from the
1. The maximum measuring voltage is 500 V.
controller.
Measure the insulation resistance between Refer to the circuit diagrams to find the
2.
the earth bar and safety chain terminals. correct connectors and wires.
3. Reconnect the disconnected connector.

Short circuit test (Annex D2.f)


Reserve a spare ceramic fuse 1 A, 5 x 20 mm for this test
Step Action Note
1. Switch the power off.
Make a temporary connection between the Refer to the circuit diagrams to find the
2.
earth bar and safety chain wire. correct connectors and wires.
Switch the power on and try to start the ele-
3. It must not start.
vator.
4. Switch the power off and remove the temporary connection.
Use the same kind of test for the brake cir- Refer to the circuit diagrams to find the
5.
cuit. correct connectors and wires.

Test alarm devices (Annex D2.m)


Step Action Note
Make an alarm in the COP, under the car Check the set delay and configurated alarm
1.
and on the car roof. connections.
2. Check that the alarm is forwarded in accordance with the configuration.
3. Reset all alarms.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_27.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 296

28 FAULT FINDING

LCE Fault codes


Refer to the Appendix 6 for the fault codes.
Fault finding procedure
If the elevator does not run correctly follow this procedure:
1 Check the normal run.
2 Investigate the LEDs in the User Interface. Refer to the table on page 296.
3 Check the fault in drive system.
4 Perform the setup drive (Set the elevator to Setup mode on page 274).
Check the LWD adjustment and adjust if needed (GAIN setting of the load weighing device on
page 272).

Normal run
The following table shows the LED sequence when the elevator is working properly:
LEDs Explanation Note
SPEED > Speed of the elevator is more than 0,1 m/
9
0,1m/s s.
Indicates that both main contactors (pos.
LED is off when both main contac-
201:1 and 201:2) have released after pre-
START PER- tors are released and start permit
8 vious drive. If the LED stays active after
MIT input on XD1/3 connector (LCE230
drive, either of the contactors is stuck
or LCEADO pos. 379) is 0 V.
open and further drives are not possible.
Main relay triac on LCE230 or
Indicates that both V3F16es drive and
MAIN CON- LCEADO (pos. 379) should open
7 LCECPU control have given main con-
TACTOR and both main contactors should
tactor activation command.
energise.
SHAFT Input XH2/3 SHAFT DOOR CON-
Indicates that all landing doors are
6 DOOR CON- TACT (pos. 379 LCE230 or
closed.
TACT LCEADO) has voltage.
CAR DOOR Input X1/7 CAR DOOR CONTACT
5 Indicates that car doors are closed.
CONTACT (pos. 379 LCE230 or LCEADO).
Command is active during the drive,
CLOSE and it disappears after the passengers
Indicates that LCE gives Close Door
4 DOOR COM- have left the car, the doors are closed
command.
MAND and the elevator is not active, i.e.
there are no active calls.
Indicates that the controller has recog- If the LED does not light when a call
nised a need for drive. This can be a from COP or landing button is given,
3 DRIVE NEED given call or specially given command either the button is faulty, the con-
for parking drive, firemens’ operation nection between button and control-
etc. ler is faulty or controller is faulty.
V3F16 reports that it is ready to drive.
Switch the power off for 10 seconds
2 V3F16 OK This report should follow as LCE gives
and try again.
the drive a command to start driving.
Input X1/5 ‘STOP CONTACT’ (pos.
SAFETY
1 Indicates that safety circuit is OK. 379 LCE230 or LCEADO) has volt-
INPUT
age.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_28.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 297

The following table shows the operation of the elevator during the setup drive:

Setup drive

no check the position of


elevator starts to move
the car and status of
upwards
magnetic switches

yes
The elevator makes a no check the polarity of
check the motor
setup drive tacho and motor
parameters

yes
magnetic stripes are in
Floor counting is no the wrong position or
correct too close to the
switches
yes

Setup ready

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_28.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 298

Faults in drive system


Before the drive can be operated
1. The motor parameters should be according to the motor
Check the motor parameters.
type.
2. Motor, brake, tacho and thermis- Check that motor, brake, tacho and thermistors are con-
tors. nected.
3. Power connections. Check the connections to the main circuit board.
4. Flat cable connections. Check the flat cable connections.
Controlling the drive
After the MODE command is given, V3F16es checks the following supervisions:
1. DC Link voltage. DC Link voltage must be over 400 VDC.
2. Braking resistor supervision. The braking resistor must be connected.
3. Motor thermistor. The thermistor must be connected *
4. Heatsink temperature. The resistance of the NTC sensor must be >1500 ohm.
5. Current supervision. Current sensor must not give overcurrent information.
START, UP or DOWN
If the supervisions are OK, the MAIN CONTACTOR ENABLE signal is sent to LCE.
1. MBE signal. IGBT will be activated.
2. Brake command. Brake opens.
3. Speed. Dependant on type of MODE command.
Crash stopping of the drive
1. Missing or incorrect tachometer
Check from the LCE.
signal.
2. Wrong polarities of motor or
LED should be lit in down direction.
tacho.
3. Wrong parameters. Load default setting.
4. Supervisions. As described above.
Fatal Error in drive system

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_28.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 299

For your notes:

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_28.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 300

29 E-LINE MONOSPACE™ HANDOVER

Detailed maintenance instructions are given in separate AS instructions for components and in
E-line MonoSpace™ system maintenance instructions. See list of related documentation in
table below.

E-line MonoSpace™
E-line MonoSpace™, as described here, consists of the following components:
Component Document Document ID
Maintenance instruction AS-6.6.3
EuReCa car
Spare parts AR-6.6.3
Maintenance instruction AS-3.12.35
ADV car and landing doors Spare parts, landing door AR-3.12.75
Spare parts, car door AR-3.12.35
Maintenance instruction
AS-10.20.10
LCE /V3F16es and Sigma and spare parts information
Troubleshooting AM-10.22.1
Replacement AS-4.5.41
MX05/06/10 machines Rope replacement AS-9.3.1
Brake adjustment AM-4.8.21
System maintenance instruction AS-1.1.21
MonoSpace™ concept
E-line maintenance handbook AS-1.1.25

NOTE: If some components, other than the ones mentioned here, are used in specific installa-
tions, the corresponding part of the documentation may not be valid without refinement.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_29.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 301

29.1 Handover after installation

In order to avoid troublesome and expensive problems during the first months of operation, it is
essential to ensure that the elevator is in proper condition when put into operation and handed
over to service. In E-line MonoSpace™, there is a predefined procedure to ensure a smooth
transition between the installation and service functions.

There are a number of reasons why a specific installation may be in an unsatisfactory condition,
but, no matter what the reasons for unsatisfactory condition are, no handover should be
accepted unless the shortcomings have been corrected or there is a clear plan and line of respon-
sibility to ensure the necessary corrective actions are taken as soon as possible.

The safety inspection also covers issues described in EN81 Annex D, which gives mandatory
actions from a code point of view, where EN regulations are of application. It is also important
to verify that some of the issues in the handover form have already been checked in the safety
inspection.

E-line MonoSpace™ Handover Form on page 306 contains a form with a list of items to be
assessed in the handover procedure. Depending on local practices, it is not necessary to specifi-
cally examine all the different points on the list, but both the installation and maintenance repre-
sentatives must be positive that the items listed are in an acceptable condition. The purpose of
the form is that its subscribers personally know that the installation meets the KONE quality
standards.

The following pages of this document contain a list which describes proper condition of the
installation in detail. It should be used at all times if you are unsure whether a component is in
an acceptable condition or not.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_29.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 302

Ride quality
– There should be no rattle or rattling noise during acceleration or deceleration.
– There should be no sudden movements or unexpected noises during the drive.

Levelling
– Maximum levelling deviation in either direction is ± 5 mm.

Car & signalisation


– Push buttons and signalisation should work as expected in the car and on landings.
– Car lighting should function correctly.
– Decoration should be clean and free from scratches and bruises.
– There must be no unnecessary installation time protections, like plastic coatings, left.
– KoneXion and alarm buttons must work as expected.
– Car labels must be in place.
– Car fan should function correctly.

Control panel
– All protections must be correctly positioned.
– All unusual registered faults should be clarified and solved.
– Control panel door must be locked and closed properly.
– There should be no abnormal noises coming from the contactors, etc.
– Overspeed governor remote test should work.
– Safety gear must stop and hold the car when overspeed governor remote test is operated
while car is moving down.
– Car emergency light and alarm bell must work when power is off.
– Rescue drive should work in both directions.
– Brake handle must fully open the brake when operated.
– The brake must stop the car in an up direction emergency stop, without excessive slide.
– All grounding on the whole installation must be properly connected to the earth terminal.
– ANY OVER BRIDGES MUST BE REMOVED!

Brake
– The brake air gap should be a maximum of 0,1 mm.
– The central nut washers must be movable by hand and the gap between washer and bottom
must be a minimum of 0,5 mm.

Machine
– All internal and external fastenings should be tight and locating pins in place.
– The braking surface on the machine should be clean and free from rust.
– There must be no mechanical contact with machine body and fixings.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_29.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 303

Traction sheave and ropes

Ropes
– Must show no signs of rust.
– Should not be dry or dirty, and there should be no strands, kinks or twists.

Rope terminations and springs


– Maximum deviation in spring length must be 3 mm.
– Rope anchorages must be correctly secured with two nuts and a split pin.
– There should be no evidence of twisting of rope termination.
– There should be no mechanical contact between rope locks.

Guide rails
– Should have a light film of oil over the full length of the blade faces.
– Should be smooth and free from safety gear marks.
– All fixings must be tight.
– Total DBG deviation in shaft must be a maximum of 2 mm.

Shaft
– Pulleys should rotate quietly.
– All shaft lighting should work.
– Service limit switches must operate correctly (used locally).
– Final limit switches must operate, the roller must rotate and the switch must meet the ramp
both top and bottom. Ramps must be correctly vertically aligned.
– Top and bottom safety spaces must be according to the layout drawing.
– The travelling cable loop should be a minimum of 150 mm from the pit bottom when the
car is on the bottom floor. The loop inner diameter should be a minimum of 400 mm.
– Car insulation should be in place.

Guide shoes
– Should be correctly adjusted with a total gap in distance between the guide rails of
2-5 mm.
– Oil cups should be full.

Travelling cable
– Should hang correctly.
– Should be in good condition with no cracks, marks etc. on external insulation.
– The text side should be outside the loop.

Car roof
– Should be clean, tidy and free from oil or grease.
– Car top light should work.

Car top control unit


– All electrical devices and switches must work correctly.

Safety devices
– Car blocking device safety switch must operate.
– Blocking pin must easily enter the slots in guide rail plate without excessive force.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_29.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 304

– Blocking pin plate must be positioned at the guide rail joint plate.
– All safety switches must operate correctly.

Counterweight
– Free movement between rails should be between 2 and 6 mm.
– Oil cups must be full.
– Rope guards must be in place.
– Filler blocks should be in place and securely fixed.

Doors
Landing door mechanical
– Unnecessary installation time protections should be removed.
– Must be adjusted so that panels do not touch each other and any gap between frame, sill or
another panel is a maximum of 6 mm, nom. 5 mm.
– Door gap in closed position with 15 kg hand force must be a maximum of 30 mm (meas-
ured at the bottom of the panels).
– Synchronization rope should touch the steel back plate when pressing it with thumb at dis-
tance of 10 cm from the synchronization roller.
– Rollers should run smooth, aligned with the guide rail.
– Anti-tip rollers must slightly touch the rail.
– Closing weight wire guard on diverting pulley should be in horizontal position, not touch-
ing the wire.
– Sills should be clean and securely fixed
– Distance between car sill and landing sill should be 29-33 mm.

Landing door locks and contacts


– Contacts should be clean and have minimum wear, metal visible.
– Lock hook and beak overlap when contact operates must be a minimum of 7 mm.
– Contact bridge should push the contact surface down a minimum of 3 mm.
– Contact bridge should be aligned to the middle of contactor holes, not touching the hole
edges.
– Electrical terminations should be tight and secured.
– Must move freely and close by itself.
– Must be securely fixed.
– Safety circuit must be interrupted if the door opens.
– Lock buffers should be in place.
– Landing lock rollers should rotate.
– Emergency unlocking must operate and the lock return automatically to locked position.

Car door electrical


– Should be free from dust.
– Contact bridge should push the contact surface down by a minimum of 3 mm.
– Door operator buttons must operate.
– Door protective devices must reverse the door action when operated.

Car door mechanical


– Door shoes must be securely fastened.
– Shoes should not allow the door to rattle on normal operation.
– Distance between door bottom and sill should be between 4 and 6 mm.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_29.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 305

– Coupler rollers should be in the middle of operator vanes, running clearance should be a
minimum of 5 mm, nom. 10 mm.
– Couplers should engage properly, engagement with rollers 5-10 mm, nom. 10 mm.
– Synchronization rope should touch the steel back plate when pressing it with thumb at dis-
tance of 10cm from the synchronization roller.
– The drive belt sides should touch each other when pressed with thumb in the centre of the
belt but not touching the metal back plate.
– Safety circuit must be interrupted if the door is opened.
– Must be adjusted so that panels do not touch each other and any gap between frame, sill or
another panel is a maximum of 10 mm, nom. 5 mm.
– Should not rattle during drive.
– Should operate smoothly, also when looking from the landing side.
– Should be correctly aligned with the slam post.
– Door operates correctly, check by operating manually from car roof.
– All rollers should run smoothly and be aligned with the guide rail.
– Panels should run smoothly and be aligned with the guide track.
– Rollers and diverters should be firmly fixed, not causing noise.
– Anti tip rollers must prevent the door from leaving the track.

Overspeed governor and safety gear


Overspeed governor and rope
– Should run quietly.
– Must operate freely when tested by hand.
– Electrical contact must work.
– Seal should be intact.
– Rope should not be dirty and there should be no strands, kinks or twists.

Safety gear
– Must be correctly aligned, the rollers must meet both guide rails evenly.
– All bolts and nuts must be in place and properly fixed.
– Both sides must operate synchronously, gripping at the same time.
– Must be fully disengaged during normal operation.
– Must move freely and engage fully, when operated by pulling the rope.

Pit
– There should be no oil, rubbish or water in the pit.
– Oil collectors should be in place.
– Buffers must be securely fixed.

Overspeed governor tension weight


– Must fully tension the governor rope.
– Safety switch trigger should be in the middle of the opening.
– Should move easily.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_29.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 306

E-line MonoSpace™ Handover Form


E-line MonoSpace™
Date
Installation/Service Handover
General data
Elevator Number Elevator Address

Installation Representative Maintenance Representative

Handover Checks

Accepted
Yes No Why not?

Ride Quality

Levelling

Car & Signalization

Control panel

Brake

Machine

Traction sheave and ropes

Guide rails

Shaft

Doors
Landing door mechanical
Landing door locks and contacts
Car door mechanical
Car door electrical

O.S.G. and Safety gear

Pit

Installation accepted to maintenance


Yes No

If rejected, person responsible for corrective actions

Agreed deadline for completion of the work

Installation Representative Maintenance Representative

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_29.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
APPENDIX AM-1.1.26
Page: 1

APPENDIX 1. Sill and top bracket variations

Sill bracket variations

Centre opening

min. 80

H
a1126mr.wmf
X = 50...75 X = 70...105 X = 105...120
H = 170 H = 180 H = 180

Side opening
X

min. 80

H
X = 25...75 X = 65...110 X = 110...170
a1126ms.wmf
H = 170 H = 180 H = 180

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_a1.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
APPENDIX AM-1.1.26
Page: 2

For your notes:

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_a1.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
APPENDIX AM-1.1.26
Page: 1

APPENDIX 2. Minimum hole dimensions in masonry

Unit Code Unit Code

a3911aj.wmf a3911ak.wmf a3911am.wmf


a3911al.wmf

s12257cu.wmf a3911ak.wmf
a3911ao.wmf
a3911ap.wmf

a3911aq.wmf a3911au.wmf
a3911an.wmf a3911av.wmf

a3911b.wmf a3911ba.wmf a3911bb.wmf a3911bc.wmf

a3911ar.wmf
a3911at.wmf
a3911be.wmf
a3911bd.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_a2.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
a3911bf.wmf

a3911cb.wmf
a3911bj.wmf
a3911cd.wmf

861

10.5

Ø2

35
Ø2

4
4
Ø
3
60 20 13.5 137.5

234 51 33.5 2 00.5

a3911ce.wmf a3911cc.wmf a3911bg.wmf


a3911bk.wmf

Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.


a3911bh.wmf
APPENDIX

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved.


a3911ai.wmf

a3911bn.wmf

a3911bp.wmf
a3911bl.wmf

a3911bo.wmf
861 861
Ø2

Ø2
4
4

5 .5
35
ø2
ø2

4
4

ø3
35
Ø3

60 1 3 7 .5 9.5 60 77
84 54 2 0 0 .5 24.5

a1126_a2.fm
3 3 .5 234
a3911ah.wmf

a3911bm.wmf
a3911bq.wmf a3911bj.wmf
Page: 2
AM-1.1.26
APPENDIX AM-1.1.26
Page: 1

APPENDIX 3. E-line KoneXion

The information has been collected from AM-13.90.1, issue B 136 pages
KoneXion can handle 1 to 8 Elevators
Package no. Location Content
1 Machine room Base Unit and fixings
2 Machine room n x LCEVOI and fixings
3 Elevator car n x Car Unit Board and fixings
4 Lift well Travelling cable (option)
5 Machine room 4-wire network cable (option)
6 Machine room Trunking (option)
7 Safe (option)

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_a3.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
APPENDIX AM-1.1.26
Page: 2

1 General arrangement

MonoSpace Machine room

100 1 - 8 Elevators
BU Power supply
210 Max. 500 m
between
BU
first controller
and last controller

Phone line Cable A


4 x 0,75

Travelling cable

COP

Install the Base Unit on the machine room wall/ headroom of the topmost floor, near the
telephone terminal socket.

Cables included in the delivery:


– Cable A: 4-wire cable (4x0,75), (Base Unit - LCEVOI board and between LCEVOI
boards)
– Phone cable: (4x0,15), length 5 m (Base Unit - phone socket)
– Power Supply cable: (3x1,5), length 5 m (Base Unit - power terminal)
– The travelling cable is already pre wired between Elevator controller and Car

The connectors on the Base unit and Car unit can if


required be removed, as shown below.

To remove it Pull the


connector up!

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_a3.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
APPENDIX AM-1.1.26
Page: 3

2 Fix the Base Unit on the wall


Mark the position of the fixing holes on the
196.5 mm

290.5 mm

wall using the enclosed paper template.

Drill 4 holes, ∅ 6 mm.


Insert raw plugs in the holes.

Remove the Base Unit cover and fix it to


the wall using 4 screws (4x25 mm).

3 Run the wiring to the controller between equipment


Fix cables to the wall according to your country specifications. Use cable trunking, when
necessary (option).

– If possible, fix the cable to the wall. Otherwise try to use the existing cable trunking on
the floor.
– Do not draw the monitoring system cables in parallel with the V3F cable for hoisting
motor.

If you have several elevators located in the same machine room, REPEAT the same fixing
operations (cables) for each elevator before continuing to the next phase.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_a3.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
APPENDIX AM-1.1.26
Page: 4

4 Connect the Base Unit to the elevator control panel

X2 X3

+DC- +SIG- +DC- +SIG-


4 WIRE B CON. 4 WIRE A CON.

wire 1 2 3 4

CABLE A
Base Unit

BU

KONE
Elevator Elevator
controller 1 controller 2

Cable A

Cable A Cable A

CABLE A
from Base Unit

1 1
©Kone Corp 1998 ©Kone Corp 1998
2 1 DC+
2 1 DC+
4 WIRE IN

4 WIRE IN

2 DC-
LCEVOI board 2 DC-
LCEVOI board
X1

X1

3 3 SIG+ 3 3 SIG+
4 SIG- 4 SIG-
4 4
1 1
4 WIRE OUT

4 WIRE OUT

2 1
2
DC+
2 1
2
DC+

3 DC-
3 DC-
X2

X2

3 SIG+ 3 SIG+

4 4 SIG-
4 4 SIG-
TO CAR

TO CAR

1 1
XC20

XC20

SIG SIG
2 SIG 2 SIG

CABLE B

CABLE B To the next CABLE B To the next


LCEVOI board from LCEVOI board LCEVOI board
(4-WIRE IN) (4-WIRE OUT) (4-WIRE IN)

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_a3.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
APPENDIX AM-1.1.26
Page: 5

5 Wiring on the car roof


Cables:
– 2x0.75mm², connection from LCECCB board to Car Unit board.
– 10x0.35mm², connection from KNX-SIGKON to the Car Unit board.
– 2x0.75mm², connection from microphone to Car Unit board
1 Connect cable from XB33 socket of the LCECCB board in car top connection box to
the X1 socket KNX-Car Unit board in the car unit box.
2 Connect cable from KNX-SIGKON board in COP to the X3 and X5 sockets on Car
Unit board.
3 Connect cable from microphone on KNX-SIGKON board to the X4 socket on Car Unit
board. Connect the wire shield with ground wire. See picture.
X1
1
K11
K12
cable from LCECCB board IN
socket XB33
OUT
IN
GND
6

XB33
KONEXION

a13901.m.wmf
LCECCB board

a13901e.wmf
MIC
GND

X4
X3 X5

1 7

Shield+
ground

microphone cable

Pre-installed
cables Flex cable from KNX-SIGKON board
on COP

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_a3.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION AM-1.1.26
Page: 6

6 Wiring on the car roof


1 Install the car unit box to the car roof.cross connection box/ remove the board.
2 Fix the board to the electronics box.
3 Set the jumpers J1 and J2 to right position. See chapter 4. (J1; No voltage = Alarm, J2;
Voltage = alarm).
4 Turn the unit number to match the in order form given number.
5 Turn the loudspeaker volume potentiometer to the mid position.
6 Set the jumpers J4 and J5 to right position. See section 4.

Min Max
Volume
3
SW1

Unit 23
90 1
45 6

Number 78

1
2

J2
Jumper J1

5
J5 J4 a13901e.wmf

Jumper

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_a3.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
APPENDIX AM-1.1.26
Page: 7

8 LCEVOI board installation and settings


Installation of elevator number 1:
– Switch off the Main Power from the control panel.
– Mount the LCEVOI board (713130 G01) by pushing it carefully to connector X1 of the
LCECPU board (POS. 375).
– Fix the LCEVOI board with four screws. If LCEVOI board is upside down the screws
does not fit.
– Connect plug XC20 (on the travelling cable) to the socket XC20 on LCEVOI board.
– Connect the Base Unit to the elevator controller. See page 4.
– Switch on the Main Power.
Repeat installation on every elevator controller.
1 DC+
©Kone Corp 1998
LCEVOI board
4 WIRE IN

2 DC-
X1

3 SIG+

4 SIG-

1 DC+
4 WIRE OUT

2 DC-
X2

3 SIG+

4 SIG-

1
TO CAR

SIG
XC20

XC20
2 SIG

travelling cable
from LCECCB board
on car top

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_a3.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
APPENDIX AM-1.1.26
Page: 8

9  Download basic system parameters from the programming centre


Before downloading the system parameters make sure that Service centre has prepared the
downloading and that all the required information exists.

The Base unit is programmed from the factory with your service centres phone number.
If it has not been pre programmed this operation can be performed on site with a PC.

Before downloading connect the battery in the base unit.

Downloading basic system parameters from the programming centre

The next job is to establish the communication with the programming centre, and download
the basic parameters of the system. Before you continue, prepare the following information:

– Phone number of the telephone line connected to the Base unit.


– Base unit identification number

a Go into any car.


b Make a test alarm. (Pass the magnet in front of the hidden reed contact and push the
alarm button. The reading contact is located on the opposite side of the microphone in
relation to the loudspeaker. If you can not see the microphone, the reed contact is
located on the right side of the loudspeaker.) The system will establish a voice connec-
tion to the programming centre (service centre).
c When the programming centre answers, identify your job site by giving the Base Unit
Identification number and Phone number.
d Stay in car, while the programming centre initiates a download operation (data is
loaded from the programming centre to the remote monitoring system on site). After
the data is loaded, the programming centre confirm the transfer.

In case of trouble shooting refer to AM-13.90.1

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_a3.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
APPENDIX AM-1.1.26
Page: 1

APPENDIX 4. User Interface manual

LEDs in the User Interface

a512i.wmf

LED Function when LED is ON Normal Colour


status
EMERGENCY ALARM Emergency alarm push button pushed in car. OFF RED
LIFT IN FAULT Fault prevents the car driving. OFF RED
CPU RUNNING Indicates that CPU and SW are working. Blinking YELLOW
INSPECTION Inspection drive from car roof is on (42:DS). OFF YELLOW
RESCUE DRIVE Rescue drive from control panel is on (270). Input XM11/2 on OFF YELLOW
LCECPU pos. 375.
CAR COMMUNICATION OK Car communication network is working. ON GREEN
SHAFT COMM. OK Shaft communication network is working. ON GREEN
+24V CONTROLLER OK + 24 V DC Control voltage is OK. ON GREEN
+5V CONTROLLER OK + 5 V DC Control voltage is OK. ON GREEN
+24V CAR & SHAFT OK + 24 V DC Car and shaft voltage is OK. ON GREEN
CHANGE BOARD Fatal failure on the LCECPU board. OFF RED
SPEED > 0,1m/s The LED is ON when the speed goes over 0,1 m/s while acceler- ON/OFF YELLOW
ating and goes OFF when the speed goes under 0,3 m/s while
decelerating.
START PERMIT One of the main contactors (201:1, 201:2) or the dynamic brake ON/OFF YELLOW
contactor (204) has not been released. Input XD1/3 on board
379.
MAIN CONTACTOR LCECPU has given main contactor activation command. ON/OFF YELLOW
SHAFT DOOR CONTACT Shaft doors are closed. Input XH2/3 on board pos. 379 has volt- ON/OFF YELLOW
age.
CAR DOOR CONTACT Car doors are closed. Input XC1/7 on board pos. 379 has volt- ON/OFF YELLOW
age.
CLOSE DOOR COMMAND Close the door command is given. ON/OFF YELLOW
DRIVE NEED Controller has recognised a need for drive. ON/OFF YELLOW
V3F OK V3F has no faults. It is able to drive. ON GREEN
SAFETY INPUT Safety chain input XC1/5 on board pos. 379 has voltage. ON GREEN
OPEN DOOR COMMAND Open door command is given. ON/OFF YELLOW
PHOTOCELL Photocell is active. Inputs XB29/2 and XB31/2 on board ON/OFF YELLOW
LCECCB pos. 806.
OPEN BUTTON Door open button is active. Input XC10/1 on board LCECOB ON/OFF YELLOW
pos. 32.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_a4.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
APPENDIX AM-1.1.26
Page: 2

LED Function when LED is ON Normal Colour


status
CLOSE FORCE LIMITER Door closing force limiter is active. Inputs XB28/8 and XB30/8 OFF YELLOW
on board LCECCB pos. 806.
DRIVE UP Drive up command is given to V3F. ON/OFF YELLOW
77:U Car is at top floor deceleration area. ON/OFF YELLOW
61:U Car is at about +10mm ... -140mm from floor level. ON/OFF YELLOW
30 Car is at door zone of front door. ON/OFF YELLOW
B30 Car is at rear door zone. ON/OFF YELLOW
61:N Car is at about -10mm ... +140mm from floor level. ON/OFF YELLOW
77:N Car is at bottom floor deceleration area. ON/OFF YELLOW
77:S Car is at terminal floor area. ON/OFF YELLOW
DRIVE DOWN Drive down command is given V3F. ON/OFF YELLOW
INHIBIT DOOR OPENING Door opening is inhibited with the switch beside this LED. OFF YELLOW
INHIBIT LANDING CALLS Landing calls are inhibited with the switch beside this LED. OFF YELLOW

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_a4.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
APPENDIX AM-1.1.26
Page: 3

29.2 How to use the User Interface

Button Action
Push MENU button to select the menu. Refer to the Parameter List,
MENU
Appendix 5.
Push SELECT / ACCEPT button to select the submenu. Refer to the
SELECT / ACCEPT
Parameter List, Appendix 5.
Arrow buttons When MENU display is blank, you can choose the required floor
CAR CALL number using arrow buttons and push CAR CALL.
UP CALL You can give landing calls up and down by pushing UP CALL or
DOWN CALL DOWN CALL.

Switch Action
INHIBIT DOOR
OPENING Use these switches to inhibit door opening and landing calls during test
INHIBIT LANDING drives to avoid interruption of the test or trapping of passengers.
CALLS
Used to make the overspeed governor test and to release the overspeed
OSG TEST
governor after testing. Refer to the SAFETY INSPECTION.
BUFFER TEST Not needed in this elevator type.

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_a4.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
APPENDIX AM-1.1.26
Page: 4

New floor or value display


Floor and submenu display Arrow buttons Landing call buttons
Menu display Car call
button

Menu button

a512i.wmf

Copyright © 1999 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved. a1126_a4.fm


Confidential. Disclosure absolutely prohibited.
APPENDIX 5 Parameter list

Setti De-
E: Fault log Function Min Max Values Description
ng fault
Scroll fault history with
1 Fault history * * * 1=latest fault
arrow buttons.
Set to 1 to clear Clear fault history from
2 Clear fault history * 0 1
fault history "E-menu".

Fault bits:
0=No fault,
1=Drive Stop,
2=RMS
overcurrent.
3=Braking
resistor,
Cycle fault bit display
Fault buffers 4=Motor too
with Select/Accept key.
hot, 5=AC
d: Drive Faults
1 (latest) .. 10 voltage,
Select fault buffer with
(oldest) 6=Inverter not
UP/DOWN keys.
OK, 7=LWD
fail,
8=Motor/tacho
fault,
9=Position lost,
10=Heatsink
prevents start

1: Elevator De-
Function Min Max Values Description
parameters fault
Select the main entrance
floor. Important for down
Compulsory 1 Main floor 1 ** ** Floor number collective control where
collection of landing calls
is towards main floor.
Call collection method.
SBC=Single Button
1=SBC, 2=DC, Collective, DC=Down
2 Control mode 2 1 4
3=FC, 4=PB Collective, FC=Full
Collective, PB=Push
Button.
Door hold open time for
Door open
Door 10 5 1 60 1 second steps car call call and landing
time
call.
Door hold open time for
Door reopen 0.1 second
11 20 1 99 door open button. E.g..
time steps
20 = 2.0 seconds.
Page 1
APPENDIX 5 Parameter list

Elevator De-
Function Min Max Values Description
parameters fault
ADO=Advanced Door
Opening. This can be
0=ADO off, used to disable ADO
12 Enable ADO 1 0 1
1=ADO on when LCEADO board is
used for relevelling doors
open (ACL B).
If the doors are
prevented from closing
for Nudging limit time, a
buzzer in COP will sound
Nudging in and the doors will start to
13 0 0 1 0=OFF, 1=ON
use close at a reduced
speed. This function
overrides door open
button and Photocell /
Curtain Of Light.
Time limit to activate
14 Nudging limit 20 10 60 1 second steps
Nudging function.
When doors are opening
or opened, the hold open
time can be reduced by
Quick close 0.1second
entering a new car call
15 with new car 0 0 99 steps,
including the floor where
call 0=not in use
the elevator is standing.
E.g.. 10=reducing time to
1.0 seconds.
Guaranteed remaining
Photocell 0.1 second door hold open time after
16 20 0 99
delay steps Photocell / Curtain Of
Light break.
Photocell / Curtain Of
Light is allowed to
Quick close
17 1 0 1 0=OFF, 1=ON shorten the door hold
by photocell
open time to Photocell
delay (1-16) value.
1=A-door first,
Simultaneous TTC CTF function.
2=B-door first,
18 door opening 3 1 3 Should be used only with
3=simultaneous
is forbidden locking of calls.
opening
TTC=Through Type Car.
Car with two
19 0 0 1 0=OFF, 1=ON Must be set ON if two
doors
doors in the car.

Page 2
APPENDIX 5 Parameter list

1: Elevator De-
Function Min Max Values Description
parameters fault
GOH IT function for
handicapped people.
When the door reaches
20 Door buzzer 0 0 1 0=OFF, 1=ON open limit the COP
buzzer sounds informing
free passage to blind
people.
0=Button (DOE
B), 1=Switch
DOE=door reopen with
Extended and buzzer
extended time.
21 door reopen 0 0 2 (DOE SI),
LCECOB board (pos. 32)
time 2=Switch
input XC17 (34:E).
without buzzer
(DOE S)
If group parking is
selected (1-33) then this
parameter value at Lift 1
is primary parking floor
0 or floor
(PAM) and this value in
number from
Parking 30 Parking floor 0 0 ** Lift 2 is secondary
lowest floor to
parking floor (PAS) of
highest floor
group control. This
should be zero on Lift 3
and also in Lift 2 if PAS
is not wanted.
0=off, 1=A-door
first, 2=B-door
Door open Door function during
31 0 0 3 first,
during parking parking.
3=both doors
open
Time that elevator has to
32 Parking delay 30 1 99 1 second steps be vacant before it can
be parked.
1=PAD option for this lift,
this elevator parks
always to 'Parking Floor'
0=off, 1=single (menu 1-30). 2=this lift
33 Parking mode 0 0 2 lift, 2=group participates to group
parking parking (PAM and PAS)
and 'Parking Floor'
parameter is used by
group

Page 3
APPENDIX 5 Parameter list

0=not in use,
Automatic ADF=automatic dispatch
otherwise floor
dispatching from specified floor.
34 0 0 ** number from
from a Vacant elevator will be
lowest floor to
specified floor sent away from this floor.
highest floor
1: Elevator De-
Function Min Max Values Description
parameters fault
0=dispatch to
main floor,
Automatic
otherwise floor ADF will send elevator to
35 dispatching 0 0 **
number from this floor.
return floor
lowest floor to
highest floor
Elevator can accept car
Car calls
Calls 40 1 0 1 0=OFF, 1=ON calls also behind
backward
travelling direction.
If nobody enters or
leaves the car during two
False car call stops (no photocell
41 0 0 1 0=OFF, 1=ON
cancel breaks) then all
remaining car call are
removed.
Car call Buzzer in COP will give
42 registered 0 0 1 0=OFF, 1=ON short sound when car
buzzer call is registered.

Elevator can in certain


conditions bypass a
Landing call 0=not used,
young landing call when
43 bypass 1 0 1 1=use Timed
serving old landing call.
allowed Out Call
Improves traffic handling
capacity.
0=normal ATS, Determines how
Attendant
44 0 0 2 1=ATS HK, attendant service station
service
2=ATS CS in COP is working.
0=no locking,
1=car calls
locked (LOC E),
2=landing calls Defines use of Locking
45 Locking type 1 0 3
locked (LOL E), Inputs on LCEOPT card.
3=car and
landing calls
locked
Elevator Must be 1 and 2 in
Elevator
Group 50 number in 1 1 6 Duplex elevators. 1,2
number
group and 3 in Triplex.

Page 4
APPENDIX 5 Parameter list

Elevator Each elevator connected


Elevator
51 number in 33 33 64 to EMC must have
number
EMC different node number.
0=Konexion not Each elevator connected
Elevator
activated to one Konexion Base
52 number in 0 0 8
1-8=Elevator Unit must have different
Konexion
number Konexion lift number.

1: Elevator De-
Function Min Max Values Description
parameters fault

1=one opening, Selects how many time a


2=several landing call can reopen
53 Reopen type 1 1 3
openings, the door of the elevator
3=REO HK which has car calls.
FEB * option. Should be
used only in elevator
Floor number. groups where one or
more elevators reach a
Shaft setup lower floor than the
54 Lowest floor 1 1 **
must be done bottom floor of the group.
after changing Note! Lift must be at
lowest floor ! bottom floor and in RDF
when this is changed.

Those of menu 1
submenus 30, 34, 35,
59, 64 and 89 that have
non-zero value lower
than new lowest floor
will be changed to be
same as new lowest
floor !
Group ID for Selects group number for
55 0 0 32 Group number
EMC EMC
0 or floor
Fire reserve number from Must be zero with FID B
Fire 59 0 0 **
floor lowest floor to and FID M.
highest floor
Fire Detection (FID) and
60 Recall floor 1 ** ** Floor number Fireman's Drive (FRD)
phase one return floor.

Page 5
APPENDIX 5 Parameter list

1: Elevator De-
Function Min Max Values Description
parameters fault

1=Germany, 2=Russia,
3=Belgium, 5=France,
0=not in use, 6=United Kingdom
1=DE, 2=CS, normal, 7=Holland,
3=BE, 5=FR, 8=United Kingdom
6=UK N, 7=NL, firefighting, 9=Sabiem
8=UK S, 9=IT special, 10=Sweden,
61 Area code 0 0 17
S, 10=SE, 11=Hong Kong,
11=HK, 12=AU, 12=Australia, 13=United
13=AE, 14=MY, Arab Emirates,
15=SG, 16=IN, 14=Malaysia,
17=AP 15=Singapore,
16=Indonesia, 17=Asian
Pacific
0=none,
1=FRD, 2=FID
BC, 3=FID BO,
4=FID BC +
FRD, 5=FID BO
+ FRD, 6=FID
MC, 7=FID MO,
Defines if there is FID,
62 Type 0 0 13 8=FID MC +
FRD or FID + FRD.
FRD, 9=FID
MO +
FRD,10=FID
AC,11=FID
AO,12=FID AC
+ FRD,13=FID
AO + FRD
1=A-door+A-
Defines how doors of
door, 2=B-
Door opening main return floor and
door+A-door
63 side during 1 1 4 alternative return floor
3=A-door+B-
fire detection will stay after FID or FRD
door, 4=B-
phase one return drive.
door+B-door
0=next possible
Emergency floor, otherwise
drive floor number Emergency Battery Drive
Emergency 64 0 0 **
destination from lowest function return floor.
floor floor to highest
floor

Page 6
APPENDIX 5 Parameter list

0=doors closed,
Door position
1=A-door open, Defines how door will
after
65 0 0 3 2=B-door open, stay after Emergency
emergency
3=both doors battery Drive return drive.
drive
open

1: Elevator De-
Function Min Max Values Description
parameters fault

Fail safe Fire Protection


Fire 0=no FPD,
Door inputs on LCEOPT
66 protection 0 0 1 1=FPD inputs in
must be activated by this
door use
parameter.
0 for all The order in which lifts
lifts=external are returned to the
EPS EPS emergency return floor
67 sequencer 0 0 6 1..6=built-in and taken into full
use order EPS service after returning.
Note! Array of Each elevator should be
six given a different value.
NOTE! When external
sequencer is in use all 6
values must be 0

Max number of elevators


Max number
68 0 0 6 0..6 returning or in full service
of cars in use
at the same time

Full load % limit can be


adjusted here. Does not
effect the over load limit
Full load
(110%) and LWD
Misc 70 indication 80 50 99 % of capacity
potentiometer
percentage
adjustments. Elevator
bypasses landing calls
when full load is on.
Inspection drive (car roof
buttons) operation area
0=stop at 77:N
can be limited by
and 77:U,
Inspection deceleration switches
71 3 0 3 1=stop at 77:U,
drive limited (pos. 77:U and 77:N).
2=stop at 77:N,
Inspection drive stops
3=no stopping
latest at the terminal floor
level.

Page 7
APPENDIX 5 Parameter list

1: Elevator De-
Function Min Max Values Description
parameters fault

OSS=Out Of Service. If
this parameter is zero
then COP OSS key
switch stops the elevator
to nearest floor and
Out of service
72 0 0 ** Floor number landing OSS key switch
recall floor
returns elevator to the
key switch location floor.
Otherwise elevator
returns to this floor by all
OSS inputs.
0=doors closed,
1=A-door open,
Out of service Door state after OSS
73 0 0 3 2=B-door open,
door recall function.
3=both doors
open
0=no PRL,
1=PRL LA,
Defines the way that this
Priority 2=PRL LO,
elevator is serving
74 landing call 0 0 6 3=PRL HA,
Priority Landing calls
type 4=PRL HO,
(connected to LCEFOB).
5=HEL A,
6=HEL O
Delay timer for car fan.
0=not in use,
Car fan Shuts down the fan after
75 5 0 59 1-59 minutes
saving the car has been vacant
before shutting
and time is elapsed.

Page 8
APPENDIX 5 Parameter list

1: Elevator De-
Function Min Max Values Description
parameters fault
Delay timer for car light.
Shuts off the car light
0=not in use,
Misc Car light after the car has been
76 0 0 59 1-59 minutes
(contin.) saving vacant and time is
before shutting
elapsed. Use if halogen
lights in the car.
CLS option. Elevator will
Car light
be stopped if car light
77 voltage 1 0 1 0=OFF, 1=ON
voltage is missing on car
supervision
roof board (LCECCB).
Konexion car Car light current detector
78 light current 0 0 1 0=OFF, 1=ON is connected to Konexion
detector car unit.
Car light can be switched
of in OSS mode. OSS car
Car light in
79 1 0 1 0=OFF, 1=ON key switch can be used
OSS mode
to close the elevator and
shut the light.

CSM option. When


0=no stopping, driving past the main
1=down floor the elevator makes
Compulsory
direction, a normal stop to let a
80 stopping at 0 0 3
2=up direction, guard to check the
main floor
3=both people inside the car. In
directions TTC car then both doors
are opened.
HAN C o tion. An
audible floor passing
buzzer signal in COP
Floor passing
81 0 0 1 0=OFF, 1=ON telling to the passengers
signal
that the car is either
stopping or passing the
floor
0=lanterns off
(LAL DB)
1=lanterns on
(LAL DN)
2=advance Selection if LAL is on
blinking + when direction is free
82 Lanterns type 1 0 3
lanterns off and door is open and
(LAL AB) advance blinking.
3=advance
blinking +
lanterns on
(LAL AN)
Page 9
APPENDIX 5 Parameter list

1: Elevator De-
Function Min Max Values Description
parameters fault
Flashing Over load indication in
83 overload 0 0 1 0=off, 1=on COP can be selected to
indicator be blinking.
1=Normal PRC
(PRC K)
2=PRC with
Priority car impulse and LCECOB board (pos. 32)
84 1 1 3
call type timer (PRC B) input XC16 (35).
3=Community
of indep. states
(PRC CS)

Power up loading of
0=PUD not in building power supply
Power up
85 0 0 99 use, delay time can be reduced. Elevator
delay
in seconds is started after air
conditioning devices etc.

0=EAQ not in EAQ option parameter is


86 EAQ in use 0 0 1 use, 1=EAQ in needed to know when to
use poll EAQ inputs.

0=EBD not in EBD option parameter is


87 EBD in use 0 0 1 use, 1=EBD in needed to know when to
use poll EBD inputs.

0=not in
use,1=A- FRE functions parameter
88 FRE door 0 0 3
door,2=B- needs this
door,3=both

0=not in use,
otherwise floor
FRE functions parameter
89 FRE floor 0 0 ** number from
needs this.
lowest floor to
highest floor
0=not in use
1=serve all
Parameters are set to
calls
accept fet/feb calls for
2=do not serve
Dual duplex two of the lifts and
90 0 0 3 normal calls on
control normal up/down calls are
main floor
denied in main floor for
3=do not serve
the third lift
fet/feb calls on
main floor

Page 10
APPENDIX 5 Parameter list

1: Elevator De-
Function Min Max Values Description
parameters fault
0=DOM CS not
DOM CS in
91 0 0 1 in use, 1=DOM Activate DOM CS.
use
CS in use
Recalls LCE parameter
Recall factory Set to 1 to (menu 1) factory settings.
Default 99 * 0 1
defaults recall defaults No effect to the drive
parameters (menu 2).
2: Drive De-
Function Min Max Values Description
parameters fault
Reloads all default
05=MX05, parameters for selected
Set motor
1 * 5 10 06=MX06, motor type.
type defaults
10=MX10 Always check before
first run.
Do not change if you are
0=enable drive,
2 Disable drive * 0 1 not sure what you are
1=disable drive
doing.
0=0.6, 1=0.8, Do not change if you are
3 Jerk * 0 3 2=1.0, 3=1.2 not sure what you are
m/s3 doing.
Do not change if you are
0=0.4, 1=0.5,
4 Acceleration * 0 2 not sure what you are
2=0.65 m/s2
doing.
0=0.5, 1=0.63, Do not change if you are
Nominal
5 * 0 4 2=0.8, 3=1.0, not sure what you are
speed
4=1.2 m/s doing.
0=0.229, .. Do not change if you are
K4 motor
6 * 0 15 15=0.319 not sure what you are
voltage
(step=0.006) doing.
0=0.096, ... Do not change if you are
7 K3 * 0 15 15=0.143 not sure what you are
(step=0.003) doing.
0=0.083, ... Do not change if you are
8 K2 * 0 15 15=0.216 (step not sure what you are
varies) doing.
0=0.0080, ... Do not change if you are
9 K1 * 0 15 15=0.0210 not sure what you are
(step varies) doing.

Page 11
APPENDIX 5 Parameter list

2: Drive De-
Function Min Max Values Description
parameters fault
0=0.5, 1=0.8,
Do not change if you are
2=1.2, 3=2.0,
10 D-Factor * 0 7 not sure what you are
4=2.7, 5=3.5,
doing.
6=4.5, 7=5.5
0=75, 1=100, Do not change if you are
11 Start delay * 0 4 2=150, 3=200, not sure what you are
4=250 ms doing.

Page 12
APPENDIX 5 Parameter list

De-
3: Floor markings Function Min Max Values Description
fault
Change seven segment
floor character symbols
Seven on Car Position Indicator.
0123456789AC
1 segment * * * Symbols are shown on
EFHJLPU-
symbols LCECPU display.
Settings may change if
menu 3-2 is used.
Used with Dot Matrix or
LCD display. Changes
numerical values of
Display code Display code symbols. Letters and
2 * 0 255
numbers value 0-255 numbers have correct
ASCII values. Settings
may change if menu 3-1
is used.
Acoustic Select acoustic floor
Acoustic floor
3 * 0 63 message messages when ACU
indicators
number unit is connected.
0=no Use this when ACU unit
announcements is connected and
Acoustic
, 1=direction, direction and/or door
4 announcemen * 0 3
2=door movement
ts
movement, announcements are
3=both required.
0=none,
1=Arabic,
2=Chinese,
3=Czech,
4=Danish,
5=Dutch,
6=English,
LCD language 7=Estonian, Selects first language
5 6 0 28
1 selection 8=Finnish, used by LCD displays.
9=Flemish,
10=French,
11=German,
12=Greek,
13=Hungarian,
14=Italian,
15=Japanese,

Page 13
APPENDIX 5 Parameter list

De-
3: Floor markings Function Min Max Values Description
fault
16=Korean,
17=Latin,
18=Latvian,
19=Lithuanian,
20=Norwegian,
21=Polish,
LCD language Selects second language
6 6 0 28 22=Portugal,
2 selection used by LCD displays.
23=Portuguese,
24=Russian,
25=Slovak,
26=Spanish,
27=Swedish,
28=Turkish
De-
Displays Function Min Max Values Description
fault
0=Normal,
1=Inspection,
Displays elevator
2=Sync,
operation mode. Same
3=Fireman,
as on TMS600 display
4=EPD, 5=ATS,
board.
6=PRL L*,
Sync=Synchronisation
8=PAD,
drive, EPD=Emergency
10=OSS,
1 Elevator mode * * * Battery Drive,
11=PRC,
ATS=Attendant Service,
15=PRL
PRL=Priority Landing
H*/HEL,
Calls, OSS=Out Of
16=EAQ,
Service, PRC=Priority
17=FRE,
Drive From Car,
18=Car light
EAQ=Earthquake.
voltage
supervision
Scrolling display of
machinery start counter
2 Start counter * * * 000000-999999 in three steps. Counter
does not lose data in
power off situations.
Scrolling display of door
Door
counter. Counter does
3 movement * * * 000000-999999
not lose data in power off
counter
situations.
Displays V3F16es
Heat sink
4 * * * C° transistor bridge heat
Temp
sink temperature.

Page 14
APPENDIX 5 Parameter list

De-
Displays Function Min Max Values Description
fault
LCE CPU Scrolling ASCII Scrolling display of
Software string. Example: elevator software
10 * * *
release "713452 drawing number and
number 2.3" version.
V3F16ES
Displays V3F16es
11 Software * * * xx.yy
software version.
release
Displays menu table
version. Display value
LCE UI Menu
12 3.12 * * xx.yy must be same as default
version
field of this line of menu
table.
Displays Drive Time
20 DTS time * * * time in seconds Supervision (DTS) timer
triggering value.
1=Run shaft Automatic landing call
end-to-end, generator. Landing call
2=Run from buttons must be
lowest floor to 2 connected and working.
Test run floors
21 0 0 3 floors above Random run cycle has as
and doors
lowest floor and many calls as there are
back, floors, each floor is
3=Random run visited once before
all floors starting new cycle.
De-
5: Commencing Function Min Max Values Description
fault
Displays elevator load in
LWD percents. Useful in Load
1 * * * % of capacity
Adjustment Weighing Device (LWD)
adjustments.
Elevator must be at
lowest floor, 61:U ON.
Turn RDF (pos.270) ON.
1=start setup Activate setup drive by
2 Shaft setup * 0 1
drive changing value of menu
5-2 from 0 to 1 and press
Select/Accept button,
then turn RDF OFF.
Select installed
KoneXion card. This
1=LCEVOI, setting cannot be
KoneXion
3 1 1 3 2=LCEADJ, changed back to lower
Interface Card
3=LCEKNX value. Must be set at
the end of commencing
!
Page 15
LCE Fault Codes Page: 1 of 15

KONE MAIN TITLE


LCE FAULT CODES
DRAWING NO:
AM-1.1.26 Appendix 6
COMPILED BY: PRODUCT CODE: ISSUE:
LCE
CHANGED BY: CHECKED BY: LANGUAGE:

DATE APPROVED BY: SW:


MS EXCEL 5.0

Fault code Description Possible reason Detection Operation To Recover

00 01 Drive time The car position information Door zone information 30 or Elevator stops Check the operation of the 30
supervision elapsed has not changed after a B30 has not changed in a immediately when and B30 switches and location
certain time period defined certain time the time has elapsed. of magnets.
in the software. The
software has not
recognized a change in the
input from the magnet

00 03 Overspeed Not used

00 04 Synchronisation has The system has not seen Position not found during After 3 failed Check the operation of 77:U/N,
failed on three signals 77:U/N, 61:U/N and three consecutive synchronisations, the 61:U/N and 30 switches and
consecutive drives 30 correctly after synchronisations. elevator returns to a location of magnets/vanes.
synchronisation drive. This terminal floor.
has happened on 3
consecutive drives.

Copyright © 1999 Kone Corporation. All rights reserved.


LCE Fault Codes Page: 2 of 15

Fault code Description Possible reason Detection Operation To Recover


00 07 Door zone switch 30 Door zone information Falling edge of the door zone Check the 30 and B30 switches
or B30 stuck continuously active. is not detected within certain and location of magnets/vanes.
time from when the elevator
leaves the door zone.

00 08 Insufficient or faulty TMS 600 fault. Cannot The size of NVRAM is Change NVRAM.
NVRAM memory on happen in LCE checked in power up
LCECPU board

00 14 Door zone sup. ADO/ACL circuit has not At least one of contactors Elevator drives to Switch the power off and try to
circuit not released been released. 486, 443:1 or 443:2 has not destination floor restart.
on two consecutive released on two consecutive normally. Then goes
drives drives out of service.

00 15 Door zone sup. ADO/ACL circuit has not At least one of contactors Elevator drives to Switch the power off and try to
circuit not energized been energized 486, 443:1 or 443:2 has not destination floor restart.
on two consecutive energized on two normally. Then goes
drives consecutive drives out of service.
00 21 Safety circuit broken Safety input 1 has lost "SAFETY INPUT1" in wrong Elevator stops Check the safety chain. Make
voltage. Some of the state. LED "SAFETY INPUT" immediately. new car call or door opening at
switches at the beginning of is OFF. floor. Or run in inspection drive
the safety circuit have
opened.

00 22 Shaft door contact Safety input 3 has lost "SAFETY INPUT1"and Elevator stops Close the door
opened during drive voltage during drive. Shaft "SAFETY INPUT2" are OK immediately.
door contacts are not but "SAFETY INPUT3" is in
properly made. wrong state. LED "SHAFT
DOOR CONTACT" is OFF

Copyright © 1999 Kone Corporation. All rights reserved.


LCE Fault Codes Page: 3 of 15

Fault code Description Possible reason Detection Operation To Recover


00 23 Car door contact Safety input 2 has lost "SAFETY INPUT1" is OK but Elevator stops Close the door
opened during drive voltage during drive. Car "SAFETY INPUT2" is in immediately.
door contact ( 87 ) is not wrong state.
properly made.
00 25 Start permit fault Main contactors have not Input "RELAY CNTRL" in Elevator does not Release the main contactors.
opened after stopping. wrong state. LED "CAR start.
DOOR CONTACT" is ON.
LED "START PERMIT" is
OFF.
00 26 Fault from drive Drive system has detected Input "VR_FAULT" in wrong Elevator does not Power down or inspection drive
system a fault which prevents state. LED "V3F16 OK" is start.
starting OFF.
00 39 77 bypass button 77U / 77N bypass button in Button in down position while Elevator does not Release the button.
stuck CPU is stuck. lift is starting. start.

00 42 Car light supervision Car light voltage has Input "CAR_LIGHT_FAILED" Elevator drives to Change the lamps in the car.
disappeared in wrong state and not in destination floor
fireman drive mode. normally. New starts
prohibited.

00 44 Door closing failed The systems has tried to Door is closing but the input Elevator tries to close Change to inspection drive or
too many closing close the door but door "DOOR_CONTACT" or the door five times. If make a new call.
trials closed information has not "SHAFT_DOOR_CONT" not successful,
been received. does not change. remains at floor with
door opened.

00 46 Car or hall door Not used


contacts or door
close limit do not
match

Copyright © 1999 Kone Corporation. All rights reserved.


LCE Fault Codes Page: 4 of 15

Fault code Description Possible reason Detection Operation To Recover


00 47 Swing door and Not used
concealed door
contacts do not
match
00 48 Reopen device Photocell or door open Input "PHOTO_CELL" , Elevator keeps the Clear obstruction. Clean /
active longer than 1 button has been active for "PHOTO_CELL_B, door opened until check photocells.
minute more than 1 minute. "REOPN" or "REOPN_B" in obstruction
wrong state. disappears.

00 51 Start failed The elevator has not been Elevator has made 5 Elevator tries to start Change to inspection drive or
able to start. Reason could unsuccessful starts. but cannot move. make a new call.
be e.g. shaft door contact Opens the door and
open tries again 5 times.

00 52 Top and bottom Both deceleration switches Inputs "LOW_LIMIT" and Elevators stops Check the inputs gets passive.
synchronisation 77:U and 77:N are active "UP_LIMIT" active immediately. New
switches active simultaneously. simultaneously. LED's "77:U starts prohibited,
simultaneously and 77:N" are ON. except in RDF mode.
00 58 Non drive time out The elevator has not been Elevator has a drive Elevator tries to start Try to restart after 10 seconds.
able to start within 100 command but but cannot move
seconds. LIFT$STATUS.SPEED =
standing
00 60 V3F-16es pickup Pick up signal from the Elevator is driving but pick Elevator drives to Automatic at terminal floor
missing drive is missing. up signal does not come terminal floor
from the drive unit.
00 70 Levelling enable Not used
stuck on
00 71 Door zone magnet Door zone magnet (30) not Door zone ( 30 or B30 ) Drives to destination Check the location of the
(30) missing found rising edge not reached floor without opening magnets.
while passed 61:U/N magnet the door.
overlapping at several floor

Copyright © 1999 Kone Corporation. All rights reserved.


LCE Fault Codes Page: 5 of 15

Fault code Description Possible reason Detection Operation To Recover


00 72 61:U magnet stuck 61:U does not change state 61:U magnet has not been Drives to destination Check the switch and magnet
fault released within certain time floor. Makes a test positions.
from door zone leaving edge. drive to lowest floor.
If still failed, remains
out of service
00 73 61:N magnet missing 61:N magnet not found 61:N magnet rising edge not Drives to destination Check the switch and magnet
reached while passing door floor. Makes a test positions.
zone drive to lowest floor.
If still failed, remains
out of service

00 74 61:N magnet stuck 61:N magnet does not 61:N magnet has not been Drives to destination Check the switch and magnet
fault change state released within certain time floor. Makes a test positions.
from door zone leaving edge. drive to lowest floor.
If still failed, remains
out of service

00 75 61:U magnet missing 61:U magnet not found 61:U magnet rising edge not Drives to destination Check the switch and magnet
reached while passing door floor without opening positions.
zone the door. Makes a
test drive to lowest
floor. If still failed,
remains out of
service

00 76 Door zone ADO/ACL circuitry has not At least one of contactors Drives to destination Try again.
supervision circuit been released. 486, 443:1 or 443:2 has not floor normally.
not released first released during drive
time
00 77 Door open limit Door open limit not reached Door is opening but input Elevators opens the Check the limit switch.
continuously inactive or limit switch broken "DOOR_OPN" or door for 15 seconds.
"DOOR_OPN_B" does not Door will be closed
change. and new drive
allowed.

Copyright © 1999 Kone Corporation. All rights reserved.


LCE Fault Codes Page: 6 of 15

Fault code Description Possible reason Detection Operation To Recover


00 78 Stuck car call At least one car call is stuck Car call cannot be cancelled Car call is not served Check the buttons in the COP.
within 60 seconds. before it returns to
normal state

00 79 Stuck landing call At least one landing call is Landing call cannot be Landing call is not Check the landing buttons.
stuck cancelled within 60 seconds. served before it
returns to normal
state

00 82 Door zone ADO/ACL circuitry has not At least one of contactors Elevator drives to Try again after 15 seconds.
supervision circuit been energized. 486, 443:1 or 443:2 has not destination floor
not energized, first energized during drive normally.
time
00 83 Position lost The elevator has lost its Position and shaft Elevator drives to Check the position of the
position. information do not match. terminal floor. magnets/vanes.
00 84 Door open limit Door open limit is stuck Door fully open input Fault code is shown Check the limit switch.
continuously active "DOOR_OPN" is active, on display.
even though the door closed
inputs are active.
01 45 EBD device failed EBD device is broken Input EBD STATUS in wrong The elevator does Change EBD device
state. not run on EBD
mode.
01 46 EBD battery failed EBD battery is empty Input EBD BATTERY The elevator does Change EBD battery
STATUS in wrong state. not run on EBD
ACUM operated Not used
01 47

Copyright © 1999 Kone Corporation. All rights reserved.


LCE Fault Codes Page: 7 of 15

Fault code Description Possible reason Detection Operation To Recover


Drive faults
01 01 Drive stop Drive has detected a fault One or more drive faults The elevator is Check other drive faults.
and stopped the elevator. detected. stopped.
01 02 RMS overcurrent Drive has detected The elevator is Try to restart if no red LED's lit
overcurrent to the motor stopped. on the inverter board. If the red
LED's are lit on the inverter
board, change the board and
inverter module.

01 03 Braking resistor Braking resistor damaged Check braking resistor and


cable connections.

01 04 Motor too hot Ambient temperature is Windings are over 120°C. New start is Wait until the motor has cooled
over 40°C. Motor Resistance in thermistors << prevented down. Check the thermistor
thermistors have reacted, 50 ohms cables and ambient
broken or disconnected. temperature. Check also the
Brake adjustment is wrong. brake adjustment.

01 05 AC voltage The supply voltage is wrong The voltage in the Elevator is stopped Check the phases. Supply
or one phase is missing or intermediate circuit is by the brake voltage should be:
safety chains is broken (in abnormal. 380VAC±10%, 400VAC±10%,
that case also the safety 415VAC+6%/-10% or (in U.K)
input LED is lit). 420VAC+10%/-15%

Copyright © 1999 Kone Corporation. All rights reserved.


LCE Fault Codes Page: 8 of 15

Fault code Description Possible reason Detection Operation To Recover


01 06 Inverter not OK 01 03 or 01 04 faults are Check the other fault codes.
detected.

01 07 LWD fail Load weighing device gives No effect during Adjust load weighing device
wrong value in the start ( driving
voltage less than 0.6V ).

01 08 Motor/Tacho/Resolve Polarity of tachometer is The difference between the The elevator is Check tachometer and resolver
r fault wrong or car balancing is speed reference and the stopped. connections, especially that the
wrong or load weighing speed feedback is too big. shield of the tachometer cable
device not correctly is connected to the cover of the
adjusted or Brake does not drive to earth the cable.
open or incorrect drive
parameters or overspeed

01 09 Position lost Drive has lost position The absolute position differs The will go into Check that the position of
from the table values at the synchronisation 77:U/N and 61:U/N
01 10 Heatsink prevents Aluminium heatsink behind Thei i heatsink
d fis61hotter
77than
U/N d
A inewth
startl is t i t / the heatsink
Wait until i i has
start the drive module is too hot 75°C prevented cooled down. Check the
or the sensor is broken thermistor wires.

Copyright © 1999 Kone Corporation. All rights reserved.


LCE Fault Codes Page: 9 of 15

Fault code Description Possible reason Detection Operation To Recover

Drive faults during setup


01 11 Vane 61:N below 61:U and 61:N switches Check the order of 61:U and
61:U swapped 61:N
01 12 61:U/N overlap too 61:U/N overlapping too Check position of 61:U and
small small 61:N switches

01 13 Synchronise switch 77:U, 77:N or 77:S switch Check the operation of 77


error failed. switches and location and
direction of the magnets/vanes.

01 14 Floors too close Two floors too close to Check that the position of the
each other magnets/vanes is in
accordance with the shaft vane
diagram.

01 15 Scaling error Normal mode or up start Restart setup drive.


command is temporary
missing.

Copyright © 1999 Kone Corporation. All rights reserved.


LCE Fault Codes Page: 10 of 15

Fault code Description Possible reason Detection Operation To Recover


Network errors
LCECCB Car top cross connection board
11 01 Car Top cross Board broken. Wiring Detected by network Normal deceleration Check the Car top cross
connection board mistake. Fuse from Power supervision software to the next level. connection board and travelling
failed Supply blown. Doors stay closed in cable connections.
inspection mode. UI
fault code.

LCECEB Car operating panel extension board


A-side
12 01 COP first extension Board broken. Wiring Detected by network Single lift remains in Check the LCECEB board and
board failed mistake. Fuse from Power supervision software normal service. UI the cables.
Supply blown. fault code.
12 02 COP second Check the second LCECEB
extension board board and the cables.
failed
12 03 COP third extension Check the third LCECEB board
board failed and the cables.

Copyright © 1999 Kone Corporation. All rights reserved.


LCE Fault Codes Page: 11 of 15

Fault code Description Possible reason Detection Operation To Recover


B-side
22 01 COP first extension Board broken. Wiring Detected by network SIngle lift remains in Check the LCECEB board and
board failed mistake. Fuse from Power supervision software normal service. UI the cables.
Supply blown. fault code.
22 02 COP second Detected by network Check the second LCECEB
extension board supervision software board and the cables.
failed
22 03 COP third extension Detected by network Check the third LCECEB board
board failed supervision software and the cables.

LCECOB Car operating panel board


A-side
13 01 Front side car Board broken. Wiring Detected by network Elevator drives to the Check the fuses and LCECOP
operating panel mistake. Fuse from Power supervision software destination, stays board.
board failed Supply blown. there with door
opened
B-side
23 01 Rear side car Board broken. Wiring Detected by network Drives to the Check the fuses and LCECOP
operating panel mistake. Fuse from Power supervision software destination, stays board.
board failed Supply blown. there with door
opened
LCEFCB Floor control board
A-side
14 01 First floor control Nodes missing, wrong type Network supervision, roll call Normal service. UI Check the floor control boards.
board failed of node found, daisy chain fault code.
broken.
14 02 Second floor control
board failed
14 03 Third floor control
board failed
14 04 Fourth floor control
board failed
14 05 Fifth floor control
board failed
: :

Copyright © 1999 Kone Corporation. All rights reserved.


LCE Fault Codes Page: 12 of 15

Fault code Description Possible reason Detection Operation To Recover


14 nn nn floor control board
failed

Copyright © 1999 Kone Corporation. All rights reserved.


LCE Fault Codes Page: 13 of 15

Fault code Description Possible reason Detection Operation To Recover


B-side
24 01 First floor control Nodes missing, wrong type Network supervision, roll call Normal service. UI Check the floor control boards.
board failed of node found, daisy chain fault code.
broken.
24 02 Second floor control
board failed
24 03 Third floor control
board failed
24 04 Fourth floor control
board failed
24 05 Fifth floor control
board failed
: :
24 nn nn floor control board
failed
LCEFOB Floor control option board
A-side
15 01 First floor control Nodes missing, wrong type Detected during network Normal service. UI Check the floor control boards.
option board failed of node found, daisy chain supervision roll call fault code.
broken.
15 02 Second floor control
option board failed
15 03 Third floor control
option board failed
15 04 Fourth floor control
option board failed
15 05 Fifth floor control
option board failed
: :
15 nn nn floor control
option board failed
B-side

25 01 First floor control Nodes missing, wrong type Detected during network Normal service. UI Check the floor control boards.
board failed of node found, daisy chain supervision roll call fault code.
broken.
Copyright © 1999 Kone Corporation. All rights reserved.
LCE Fault Codes Page: 14 of 15

Fault code Description Possible reason Detection Operation To Recover


25 02 Second floor control
board failed
25 03 Third floor control
board failed
25 04 Fourth floor control
board failed
25 05 Fifth floor control
board failed
: :
25 nn nn floor control board
failed
LCEGTW Gateway board
16 01 Gateway board failed Board broken, wiring Detected by network Normal single lift Check the LCEGTW board and
mistake, board missing. supervision software operation. UI fault connections
code.
LCEOPT Option board
A-side
17 01 First option board Board broken, wiring Detected by network Check the LCEOPT board and
failed mistake, board missing, supervision software connections
wrong rotary switch setting.

17 02 Second option board


failed
17 03 Third option board
failed
17 04 Fourth option board
failed
: :
17 nn nn option board
failed

Copyright © 1999 Kone Corporation. All rights reserved.


LCE Fault Codes Page: 15 of 15

Fault code Description Possible reason Detection Operation To Recover


B-side
27 01 First option board Board broken, wiring Detected by network Check the LCEOPT board and
failed mistake, board missing, supervision software connections
wrong rotary switch setting.

27 02 Second option board


failed
27 03 Third option board
failed
27 04 Fourth option board
failed
: :
27 nn nn option board
failed

Copyright © 1999 Kone Corporation. All rights reserved.


Author: HATJSI SPI floor markings specification (draft) Page 1 of 6

Revisions:
HATJSI 17.11.1997 Fixed 0xfe to ASCII 0x7f, added three bars (shaft setup) to ASCII 0x83.
HATJSI 30.10.1997 Changed code for '_'.
HATJSI 17.10.1997 Added 0xfe for segment testing.
HATJSI 1.6.1997 Initial Draft

0 - 127 Standard ASCII characters.


0 - 31, 127 Non-printable ASCII characters
32 - 126 Printable ASCII characters

128 - 255 Special SPI symbols.


128 - 144 Special symbols
145 - 149 Cyrillic characters
150 - 175 Undefined
176 - 185 Numerals with decimal point
186 - 255 Undefined

Ascii Ascii SPI Dot


7- 16-
code code Sign SPI code (bin) code matrix LCD Note
segm. segm.
(dec) (hex) (hex) 14x15
0 0x00 <NUL> b00000000 0x00 Non-printable ASCII
1 0x01 <SOH> b00000000 0x00 Non-printable ASCII
2 0x02 <STX> b00000000 0x00 Non-printable ASCII
3 0x03 <ETX> b00000000 0x00 Non-printable ASCII
4 0x04 <EOT> b00000000 0x00 Non-printable ASCII
5 0x05 <ENQ> b00000000 0x00 Non-printable ASCII
6 0x06 <ACK> b00000000 0x00 Non-printable ASCII
7 0x07 <BEL> b00000000 0x00 Non-printable ASCII
8 0x08 <BS> b00000000 0x00 Non-printable ASCII
9 0x09 <HT> b00000000 0x00 Non-printable ASCII
10 0x0a <LF> b00000000 0x00 Non-printable ASCII
11 0x0b <VT> b00000000 0x00 Non-printable ASCII
12 0x0c <FF> b00000000 0x00 Non-printable ASCII
13 0x0d <CR> b00000000 0x00 Non-printable ASCII
14 0x0e <SO> b00000000 0x00 Non-printable ASCII
15 0x0f <SI> b00000000 0x00 Non-printable ASCII
16 0x10 <DLE> b00000000 0x00 Non-printable ASCII
17 0x11 <DC1> b00000000 0x00 Non-printable ASCII
18 0x12 <DC2> b00000000 0x00 Non-printable ASCII
19 0x13 <DC3> b00000000 0x00 Non-printable ASCII
20 0x14 <DC4> b00000000 0x00 Non-printable ASCII
21 0x15 <NAK> b00000000 0x00 Non-printable ASCII
22 0x16 <SYN> b00000000 0x00 Non-printable ASCII
23 0x17 <ETB> b00000000 0x00 Non-printable ASCII
24 0x18 <CAN> b00000000 0x00 Non-printable ASCII
25 0x19 <EM> b00000000 0x00 Non-printable ASCII
26 0x1a <SUB> b00000000 0x00 Non-printable ASCII
27 0x1b <ESC> b00000000 0x00 Non-printable ASCII
28 0x1c <FS> b00000000 0x00 Non-printable ASCII
29 0x1d <GS> b00000000 0x00 Non-printable ASCII
30 0x1e <RS> b00000000 0x00 Non-printable ASCII
31 0x1f <US> b00000000 0x00 Non-printable ASCII
32 0x20 space b00000000 0x00 x x x x Default set symbols
33 0x21 ! b10000000 0x80 x Reserved
34 0x22 " b10000001 0x81 x Reserved
35 0x23 # b10000010 0x82 x Reserved
36 0x24 $ b10000011 0x83 x Reserved
37 0x25 % b10000100 0x84 x Reserved
38 0x26 & b10000101 0x85 x Reserved
39 0x27 ' b10001000 0x88 x Reserved
40 0x28 ( b10001001 0x89 x Reserved
41 0x29 ) b10001010 0x8a x Reserved
42 0x2a * b10001011 0x8b x x Reserved
43 0x2b + b10001100 0x8c x x x Reserved
44 0x2c , b10001101 0x8d x Reserved
45 0x2d - b01000000 0x40 x x x x Default set symbols
46 0x2e . b10001110 0x8e x Reserved
47 0x2f / b10001111 0x8f x Reserved

a1126_a7.xls - 3.6.1999 - 12:44


Author: HATJSI SPI floor markings specification (draft) Page 2 of 6

Ascii Ascii SPI Dot


7- 16-
code code Sign SPI code (bin) code matrix LCD Note
segm. segm.
(dec) (hex) (hex) 14x15
48 0x30 0 b00111111 0x3f x x x x Default set symbols
49 0x31 1 b00000110 0x06 x x x x Default set symbols
50 0x32 2 b01011011 0x5b x x x x Default set symbols
51 0x33 3 b01001111 0x4f x x x x Default set symbols
52 0x34 4 b01100110 0x66 x x x x Default set symbols
53 0x35 5 b01101101 0x6d x x x x Default set symbols
54 0x36 6 b01111101 0x7d x x x x Default set symbols
55 0x37 7 b00000111 0x07 x x x x Default set symbols
56 0x38 8 b01111111 0x7f x x x x Default set symbols
57 0x39 9 b01101111 0x6f x x x x Default set symbols
58 0x3a : b11100000 0xe0 x Reserved
59 0x3b ; b11100001 0xe1 x Reserved
60 0x3c < b11100010 0xe2 x Reserved
61 0x3d = b11100011 0xe3 x Reserved
62 0x3e > b11100100 0xe4 x Reserved
63 0x3f ? b11100101 0xe5 x Reserved
64 0x40 @ b10010000 0x90 x Reserved
65 0x41 A b01110111 0x77 x x x x Default set symbols
66 0x42 B b10010001 0x91 x x x Default set symbols
67 0x43 C b00111001 0x39 x x x x Default set symbols
68 0x44 D b10010010 0x92 x x x Default set symbols
69 0x45 E b01111001 0x79 x x x x Default set symbols
70 0x46 F b01110001 0x71 x x x x Default set symbols
71 0x47 G b10010011 0x93 x x x Default set symbols
72 0x48 H b01110110 0x76 x x x x Default set symbols
73 0x49 I b10010100 0x94 x x x Default set symbols
74 0x4a J b00011110 0x1e x x x x Default set symbols
75 0x4b  b10010101 0x95 x x x Default set symbols
76 0x4c L b00111000 0x38 x x x x Default set symbols
77 0x4d M b10010110 0x96 x x x Default set symbols
78 0x4e N b10010111 0x97 x x x Default set symbols
79 0x4f O b10011000 0x98 x x x Default set symbols
80 0x50 P b01110011 0x73 x x x x Default set symbols
81 0x51 Q b10011001 0x99 x x x Default set symbols
82 0x52 R b10011010 0x9a x x x Default set symbols
83 0x53 S b10011011 0x9b x x x Default set symbols
84 0x54 T b10011100 0x9c x x x Default set symbols
85 0x55 U b00111110 0x3e x x x x Default set symbols
86 0x56 V b10011101 0x9d x x x Default set symbols
87 0x57 W b10011110 0x9e x x x Default set symbols
88 0x58 X b10011111 0x9f x x x Default set symbols
89 0x59 Y b10100000 0xa0 x x x Default set symbols
90 0x5a Z b10100001 0xa1 x x x Default set symbols
91 0x5b [ b10100010 0xa2 x Reserved
92 0x5c \ b10100011 0xa3 x Reserved
93 0x5d ] b10100100 0xa4 x Reserved
94 0x5e ^ b10100101 0xa5 x Reserved
95 0x5f _ b00001000 0x08 x x x x Default set symbols
96 0x60 ` b10100111 0xa7 x Reserved
97 0x61 a b10101000 0xa8 x Reserved
98 0x62 b b01111100 0x7c x x Default set symbols
99 0x63 c b10101001 0xa9 x Reserved
100 0x64 d b01011110 0x5e x x Default set symbols
101 0x65 e b10101010 0xaa x Reserved
102 0x66 f b10101011 0xab x Reserved
103 0x67 g b10101100 0xac x Reserved
104 0x68 h b10101101 0xad x Reserved
105 0x69 i b10101110 0xae x Reserved
106 0x6a j b10101111 0xaf x Reserved
107 0x6b k b10110000 0xb0 x Reserved
108 0x6c l b10110001 0xb1 x Reserved
109 0x6d m b10110010 0xb2 x Reserved
110 0x6e n b10110011 0xb3 x Reserved
111 0x6f o b10110100 0xb4 x Reserved
112 0x70 p b10110101 0xb5 x Reserved

a1126_a7.xls - 3.6.1999 - 12:44


Author: HATJSI SPI floor markings specification (draft) Page 3 of 6

Ascii Ascii SPI Dot


7- 16-
code code Sign SPI code (bin) code matrix LCD Note
segm. segm.
(dec) (hex) (hex) 14x15
113 0x71 q b10110110 0xb6 x Reserved
114 0x72 r b10110111 0xb7 x Reserved
115 0x73 s b10111000 0xb8 x Reserved
116 0x74 t b10111001 0xb9 x Reserved
117 0x75 u b10111010 0xba x Reserved
118 0x76 v b10111011 0xbb x Reserved
119 0x77 w b10111100 0xbc x Reserved
120 0x78 x b10111101 0xbd x Reserved
121 0x79 y b11000000 0xc0 x Reserved
122 0x7a z b11000001 0xc1 x Reserved
123 0x7b { b11000010 0xc2 x Reserved
124 0x7c | b11000011 0xc3 x Reserved
125 0x7d } b11000100 0xc4 x Reserved
126 0x7e ~ b11000101 0xc5 x Reserved
127 0x7f <DEL> b11111110 0xfe x x x x Turn off all segments (test)
128 0x80 2/3 b11101110 0xee Reserved
129 0x81 1/2 b11101100 0xec Reserved
130 0x82 0/1 b11110000 0xf0 Reserved
131 0x83  b01001001 0x49 x x x x Shaft setup symbol
132 0x84 b00000000 0x00 Unused
133 0x85 b00000000 0x00 Unused
134 0x86 b00000000 0x00 Unused
135 0x87 b00000000 0x00 Unused
136 0x88 b00000000 0x00 Unused
137 0x89 b00000000 0x00 Unused
138 0x8a b00000000 0x00 Unused
139 0x8b b00000000 0x00 Unused
140 0x8c b00000000 0x00 Unused
141 0x8d b00000000 0x00 Unused
142 0x8e b00000000 0x00 Unused
143 0x8f b00000000 0x00 Unused
144 0x90 b00000000 0x00 Unused
145 0x91 b00000000 0x00 Unused
146 0x92 b00000000 0x00 Unused
147 0x93 b00000000 0x00 Unused
148 0x94 b00000000 0x00 Unused
149 0x95 b00000000 0x00 Unused

150 0x96 b11000110 0xc6 x x Small font cyrillic

151 0x97 b11000111 0xc7 x x Small font cyrillic

152 0x98 b11001000 0xc8 x x Small font cyrillic

153 0x99 b11001001 0xc9 x x Small font cyrillic

154 0x9a b11001010 0xca x x Small font cyrillic

155 0x9b b11001011 0xcb Reserved, small font cyrillic


156 0x9c b11001100 0xcc Reserved, small font cyrillic
157 0x9d b11001101 0xcd Reserved, small font cyrillic
158 0x9e b11001110 0xce Reserved, small font cyrillic
159 0x9f b00000000 0x00 Unused
160 0xa0 b00000000 0x00 Unused
161 0xa1 b00000000 0x00 Unused
162 0xa2 b00000000 0x00 Unused
163 0xa3 b00000000 0x00 Unused
164 0xa4 b00000000 0x00 Unused
165 0xa5 b00000000 0x00 Unused
166 0xa6 b00000000 0x00 Unused
167 0xa7 b00000000 0x00 Unused
168 0xa8 b00000000 0x00 Unused
169 0xa9 b00000000 0x00 Unused

a1126_a7.xls - 3.6.1999 - 12:44


Author: HATJSI SPI floor markings specification (draft) Page 4 of 6

Ascii Ascii SPI Dot


7- 16-
code code Sign SPI code (bin) code matrix LCD Note
segm. segm.
(dec) (hex) (hex) 14x15
170 0xaa b00000000 0x00 Unused
171 0xab b00000000 0x00 Unused
172 0xac b00000000 0x00 Unused
173 0xad b00000000 0x00 Unused
174 0xae b00000000 0x00 Unused
175 0xaf b00000000 0x00 Unused
176 0xb0 0. b10111111 0xbf x x x Numeral with decimal point
177 0xb1 1. b10000110 0x86 x x x Numeral with decimal point
178 0xb2 2. b11011011 0xdb x x x Numeral with decimal point
179 0xb3 3. b11001111 0xcf x x x Numeral with decimal point
180 0xb4 4. b11100110 0xe6 x x x Numeral with decimal point
181 0xb5 5. b11101101 0xed x x x Numeral with decimal point
182 0xb6 6. b11111101 0xfd x x x Numeral with decimal point
183 0xb7 7. b10000111 0x87 x x x Numeral with decimal point
184 0xb8 8. b11111111 0xff x x x Numeral with decimal point
185 0xb9 9. b11101111 0xef x x x Numeral with decimal point
186 0xba b00000000 0x00 Unused
187 0xbb b00000000 0x00 Unused
188 0xbc b00000000 0x00 Unused
189 0xbd b00000000 0x00 Unused
190 0xbe b00000000 0x00 Unused
191 0xbf b00000000 0x00 Unused
192 0xc0 b00000000 0x00 Unused
193 0xc1 b00000000 0x00 Unused
194 0xc2 b00000000 0x00 Unused
195 0xc3 b00000000 0x00 Unused
196 0xc4 b00000000 0x00 Unused
197 0xc5 b00000000 0x00 Unused
198 0xc6 b00000000 0x00 Unused
199 0xc7 b00000000 0x00 Unused

200 0x91 b11110001 0xf1 x x Big font cyrillic

201 0x92 b11110010 0xf2 x x Big font cyrillic

202 0x93 b11110011 0xf3 x x Big font cyrillic

203 0x94 b11110100 0xf4 x x Big font cyrillic

204 0x95 b11110101 0xf5 x x Big font cyrillic

205 0xcd b11110110 0xf6 Reserver, big font cyrillic


206 0xce b11110111 0xf7 Reserver, big font cyrillic
207 0xcf b11111000 0xf8 Reserver, big font cyrillic
208 0xd0 b11111001 0xf9 Reserver, big font cyrillic
209 0xd1 b00000000 0x00 Unused
210 0xd2 b00000000 0x00 Unused
211 0xd3 b00000000 0x00 Unused
212 0xd4 b00000000 0x00 Unused
213 0xd5 b00000000 0x00 Unused
214 0xd6 b00000000 0x00 Unused
215 0xd7 b00000000 0x00 Unused
216 0xd8 b00000000 0x00 Unused
217 0xd9 b00000000 0x00 Unused
218 0xda b00000000 0x00 Unused
219 0xdb b00000000 0x00 Unused
220 0xdc G b11010000 0xd0 Big font ASCII letters
221 0xdd K b11010001 0xd1 Big font ASCII letters
222 0xde M b11010010 0xd2 Big font ASCII letters
223 0xdf Q b11010011 0xd3 Big font ASCII letters
224 0xe0 W b11010100 0xd4 Big font ASCII letters
225 0xe1 b11010101 0xd5 Reserved, big font ASCII
226 0xe2 b11010110 0xd6 Reserved, big font ASCII

a1126_a7.xls - 3.6.1999 - 12:44


Author: HATJSI SPI floor markings specification (draft) Page 5 of 6

Ascii Ascii SPI Dot


7- 16-
code code Sign SPI code (bin) code matrix LCD Note
segm. segm.
(dec) (hex) (hex) 14x15
227 0xe3 b11010111 0xd7 Reserved, big font ASCII
228 0xe4 b11011000 0xd8 Reserved, big font ASCII
229 0xe5 b00000000 0x00 Unused
230 0xe6 b00000000 0x00 Unused
231 0xe7 b00000000 0x00 Unused
232 0xe8 b00000000 0x00 Unused
233 0xe9 b00000000 0x00 Unused
234 0xea b00000000 0x00 Unused
235 0xeb b00000000 0x00 Unused
236 0xec b00000000 0x00 Unused
237 0xed b00000000 0x00 Unused
238 0xee b00000000 0x00 Unused
239 0xef b00000000 0x00 Unused
240 0xf0 b00000000 0x00 Unused
241 0xf1 b00000000 0x00 Unused
242 0xf2 b00000000 0x00 Unused
243 0xf3 b00000000 0x00 Unused
244 0xf4 b00000000 0x00 Unused
245 0xf5 b00000000 0x00 Unused
246 0xf6 b00000000 0x00 Unused
247 0xf7 b00000000 0x00 Unused
248 0xf8 b00000000 0x00 Unused
249 0xf9 b00000000 0x00 Unused
250 0xfa b00000000 0x00 Unused
251 0xfb b00000000 0x00 Unused
252 0xfc b00000000 0x00 Unused
253 0xfd b00000000 0x00 Unused
254 0xfe b00000000 0x00 Unused
255 0xff b00000000 0x00 Unused

a1126_a7.xls - 3.6.1999 - 12:44


Author: HATJSI SPI floor markings specification (draft) Page 6 of 6

Ascii Ascii SPI Dot


7- 16-
code code Sign SPI code (bin) code matrix LCD Note
segm. segm.
(dec) (hex) (hex) 14x15

SPI code map 0x00 0x20 0x40 0x60 0x80 0xa0 0xc0 0xe0
0x01 0x21 0x41 0x61 0x81 0xa1 0xc1 0xe1
0x02 0x22 0x42 0x62 0x82 0xa2 0xc2 0xe2
0x03 0x23 0x43 0x63 0x83 0xa3 0xc3 0xe3
0x04 0x24 0x44 0x64 0x84 0xa4 0xc4 0xe4
0x05 0x25 0x45 0x65 0x85 0xa5 0xc5 0xe5
0x06 0x26 0x46 0x66 0x86 0xa6 0xc6 0xe6
0x07 0x27 0x47 0x67 0x87 0xa7 0xc7 0xe7
0x08 0x28 0x48 0x68 0x88 0xa8 0xc8 0xe8
0x09 0x29 0x49 0x69 0x89 0xa9 0xc9 0xe9
0x0a 0x2a 0x4a 0x6a 0x8a 0xaa 0xca 0xea
0x0b 0x2b 0x4b 0x6b 0x8b 0xab 0xcb 0xeb
0x0c 0x2c 0x4c 0x6c 0x8c 0xac 0xcc 0xec
0x0d 0x2d 0x4d 0x6d 0x8d 0xad 0xcd 0xed
0x0e 0x2e 0x4e 0x6e 0x8e 0xae 0xce 0xee
0x0f 0x2f 0x4f 0x6f 0x8f 0xaf 0xcf 0xef
0x10 0x30 0x50 0x70 0x90 0xb0 0xd0 0xf0
0x11 0x31 0x51 0x71 0x91 0xb1 0xd1 0xf1
0x12 0x32 0x52 0x72 0x92 0xb2 0xd2 0xf2
0x13 0x33 0x53 0x73 0x93 0xb3 0xd3 0xf3
0x14 0x34 0x54 0x74 0x94 0xb4 0xd4 0xf4
0x15 0x35 0x55 0x75 0x95 0xb5 0xd5 0xf5
0x16 0x36 0x56 0x76 0x96 0xb6 0xd6 0xf6
0x17 0x37 0x57 0x77 0x97 0xb7 0xd7 0xf7
0x18 0x38 0x58 0x78 0x98 0xb8 0xd8 0xf8
0x19 0x39 0x59 0x79 0x99 0xb9 0xd9 0xf9
0x1a 0x3a 0x5a 0x7a 0x9a 0xba 0xda 0xfa
0x1b 0x3b 0x5b 0x7b 0x9b 0xbb 0xdb 0xfb
0x1c 0x3c 0x5c 0x7c 0x9c 0xbc 0xdc 0xfc
0x1d 0x3d 0x5d 0x7d 0x9d 0xbd 0xdd 0xfd
0x1e 0x3e 0x5e 0x7e 0x9e 0xbe 0xde 0xfe
0x1f 0x3f 0x5f 0x7f 0x9f 0xbf 0xdf 0xff

0x40 White cells indicates free codes.

0x40 Shadowed cells indicates used codes.

0x1e Bold text indicates values displayable with seven segment.

a1126_a7.xls - 3.6.1999 - 12:44

You might also like